The Rudolf Steiner Archive

When approaching the mystery of death, one must always bear in mind, as was emphasized again yesterday, that in order to characterize the spiritual worlds, it is necessary to change the meaning of our ordinary words, which are tailored for the physical world. For the dead, the so-called dead, enter the spiritual world, and as we have already repeatedly indicated, it is fundamentally different in the spiritual world than in the physical world.

Not only according to spiritual scientific insights, but also in accordance with ordinary physical reason, it can be thought that when entering the spiritual world through the gate of death, the first thing for the dead person is: the loosening of the physical body from what is within this physical body his other human existence. This is, of course, a very trivial truth. Today, we want to look at the processes that come into play when describing the gate of death and the further pursuit of the path between death and a new birth, in terms of the inner experiences of the dead person, in the sense in which this can be explored in spiritual science.

For the person who remains behind here in physical life, it is indeed the case that he has the sensation that what is enclosed in the physical body shell leaves the one or ones remaining behind, that the dead person goes away into another world. The first perception that the dead person has – as I said, according to what can be researched for spiritual science – is that he, in turn, is abandoned by the inhabitants of the earth and also by his physical body, by that which was the tool for his perception, for his thinking and feeling and his ability to will between birth and death. So these, who were around him, who were connected with him, go away from him: that is his first perception. This perception is initially linked to the processes that we have often described: that the earth itself, in a sense, moves away, so that it takes away the physical shell of the body of the one passing through the gateway of death. It is absolutely as if the dead person, so to speak, were to feel that he is lagging behind a movement that he did not actually perceive here on earth, that he is lagging behind the earth's own movement; the earth is leaving him and with the earth everything that surrounded him on earth. And now he is incorporated into a completely different world, but one through which he now perceives something that was previously completely hidden from him, through which he perceives that what was given to him as a physical shell is bound to the earth, and also to the movements of the earth. He has a feeling, although that is a rather inaccurate expression, that he can no longer follow the path that the earth and its spirits take; so they leave him. He remains in a certain greater state of rest, he integrates himself, as it were, into a quieter world.

For the dead person, many things are now based on this perception of being abandoned, namely also by the physical shell of the body, by everything that one has experienced with people between birth and death, everything that one has learned from people. During his life on earth, the possession of his physical body was something he took for granted. Therefore, what he now perceives is something completely new, and we will see how different these perceptions are depending on whether one dies a so-called natural death from illness or old age or a violent death, for example, the kind of 'death that many thousands now have to die.'

This realization that one is being abandoned by that which was naturally one's own, gives rise to something completely new in the life of the soul. It means that something arises in the life of the soul that one could not have become acquainted with while dwelling in the body. The first thing that arises in the life of the soul is, I would say, the opposite feeling towards life. Here on earth one has the feeling that life is given from outside, that one lives through the life forces that are given to one from the outside of the earth. Now, so to speak, the earth leaves with what it has given one, and immediately, through this leaving, the feeling arises that the power of enlivenment is now bubbling up from within. So the first thing is the perception of being enlivened. It is the transition to a certain activity, whereas before you remained in passivity: You are invigorating that which you now are. You are within yourself. What you previously called the world has gone away from you. That in which you now live, but by completely filling it, that generates in itself the power of invigoration, that is invigorated. And in concrete terms, this results in what I have often called the panorama of life, the flooding life in all that one has experienced between birth and death. The images of this life arise before the soul. It rises, as it were, from the point where one is, like a powerful, self-generating “dream, the whole of one's past life between birth and death. But this image needs strength so that it is not a dream. It would be like a dream flowing by if one had not gained the power of animation by having attained this consciousness: one's own physical shell detaches itself from the spiritual-soul. The dream comes to life. What would otherwise be only a world of dark, floating dream images is animated from the same point; it becomes a living world, a living panorama of life. One is oneself the source of the animation of what thus emerges as a dream. This is the direct experience after death.

All this happens while the person is hardly aware that he has emerged from his previous consciousness, but only feels that something has stirred within him, as if from the center of his being, spreading out and escaping that life to which he has so far passively surrendered. What one did not know between birth and death: that thoughts, which otherwise merely undulated like a dream of the ego, are alive, one now knows that. And one now lives one's self out of the formerly alien life into this inner life. One experiences what it means that what was previously more externally connected to one, now seizes the innermost. What was previously not life, but an image of life, seizes the imagination, the thinking. And while one is finding one's way into this conception, gradually a further one arises. This is this, which one could call: a living into a sounding through of the panorama of life with the universe. I have already described these things more generally. But one must always look at them more closely in order to penetrate the secrets of the world.

At first, one's innermost life dream comes to life, so to speak, and becomes a living universe, a living cosmos. Then, as it were, it is filled with what one can call: the music of the spheres of the universe resonates through this life dream. One experiences how what one was oneself between birth and death as a part of the cosmos is now absorbed by the cosmos, how this integrates with that which is now not earthly. For one has gone through the earthly between birth and death. And then the next thing is that one feels how intimately the cosmos permeates what one was as a part. One has the feeling of an inner light coming on and illuminating what one was. But all this streams and resounds, so to speak, into the panorama of life. Then the etheric body detaches itself – because these processes all happen while the person is connected to the etheric body – and what is called the detachment of the etheric body occurs.

Now this experience, this perception of the panorama of life, this clothing of the panorama of life with the sounding and luminous substances of the cosmos, is similar to the way the physical body integrates into the human being when one enters into existence through birth. Just as the human substance given to one by the earth, so to speak, integrates into the human soul, so the cosmic, the universal, integrates after passing through the gate of death. This experience, which has been described, is necessary. And when one really follows the spiritual side of life between death and a new birth, then one notices the significance for this whole life between death and a new birth of this first experience after passing through the gate of death. Here in physical life on earth — we must be quite clear about this, I have emphasized it often — we have our sense of self-consciousness because we live in the physical body. I emphasize: the sense of self, not the self. Our self is assigned to us by the Spirits of Form, that is something else. But we have our sense of self because we are immersed in the physical body. We only have to be quite clear about the nature of this sense of self in the waking state. The best way to understand it is to imagine you are moving through a room. At first you feel nothing; now you are touching something. The outside world touches you, but you become aware of yourself. You become aware of the impact that the outside world has on you, you become aware of the outside world, you feel yourself touching the outside world.

In fact, we have our sense of self in the physical world by bumping into the outside world everywhere. Of course, not only with the sense of touch, but when we open our eyes, we also bump into the outside world; when sounds reach our ears, we become aware of it when our hearing bumps into the sounds.

But we also become aware of ourselves by emerging from the spiritual world every morning and immersing ourselves in the physical world. This immersion in our physical body, that is, this collision of our ego and astral body with the etheric body and physical body, that is what creates our sense of self. This is why there is usually a lack of self-awareness in the dream world: because we need this collision with the physical body and the etheric body to have self-awareness.

For a clear, distinct, waking self-awareness, we need this collision. Now, the outer physical body has been taken from the one who has passed through the gate of death. In the same way as between birth and death, he cannot produce self-awareness. Without consciousness of self, he would have to tread the path between death and a new birth if this consciousness of self were not now generated by another path. This other path is that everything we now experience directly in the etheric body after we have passed through the gate of death remains in existence all the time between death and a new birth.

In this respect, too, the experience in the spiritual world between death and a new birth is the opposite of the physical experience here between birth and death. Here in the physical world, no one can consciously remember the moment of their birth; remembrance only sets in later. Man does not remember his birth, it is, so to speak, too far in the past for the memory process to go backwards. But what the person experiences inwardly from the other side of death remains throughout life between 'death and a new birth for the soul. The experience of death remains just as surely as the experience of birth disappears when the person enters the physical world. The physical person does not look back on his birth in the physical world, but he looks back on death in the whole time between death and a new birth. This looking back, this encounter with the experience of death, is what creates the sense of self between death and a new birth, and we owe it to that.

The sight of death is only from the side of physical experience, if at all, something terrible. Only there it has horror and terror, if one sees it from this side. But the dead see it from the other side. And seen from this side, there is really nothing terrible about the fact that the moment of death remains, so to speak, for the whole of life between death and a new birth. For even if it is annihilation, seen from this physical side of life, it is the most glorious, the greatest, the most beautiful, the most sublime, which can be seen continually from the other side of life. There he constantly testifies to the victory of spirit over matter, to the self-creative power of spirit. In this intuitive perception of the self-creative power of spirit, the consciousness of self exists in the spiritual worlds.

In the spiritual worlds, one has this self-awareness precisely because one is constantly creating oneself inwardly, never appealing to an existing being, but always creating oneself, and in this self-creation, one touches back to the moment of death. So we can also indicate how the sense of self-awareness is generated in the time between death and rebirth. The birth of self-awareness is of great significance in this experience in the first period after death. And of course, this first experience is also different depending on whether the person, let us say, reaches an advanced age, then passes through the gate of death in a natural way, or is perhaps carried off in the tenderest childhood or in the prime of life. And of quite particular significance in relation to the difference in this area is approximately — not pedantically exact, of course — the age of thirty-five. What now takes place in a thousand different ways, that young people in the prime of their lives pass through the portal of death: tomorrow it will show us how this is further modified by death approaching them from outside. But if a person does pass through the portal of death young, then the view of this described tableau of life with its invigorating events is already different than if one passes through the portal of death after the age of thirty-five.

You can say, although it is of course difficult to find the right words for these circumstances, that someone who dies at a young age has the feeling that the dream image of their life appears and they bring it to life from the center of their life. But as you pour your own vitalizing powers over this tableau of life, something still stands behind this tableau of life like a remnant from the world from which you have stepped out by going through birth.

When a child dies, the tableau of life is extremely short. If, for example, a six-year-old child dies, the tableau of life is still not very substantial. But behind this tableau, so to speak, entering from behind and casting a shadow over it, there is still much of what was lived through in the spiritual world before birth, or, as one also said in the German language in the past – Goethe used the expression – before one “came into the world”. A beautiful expression that has now been lost. And when a child dies who has not yet any memory of the past, for whom the time has not yet come when one remembers back, then such a tableau of life does not actually exist for him, in which he feels himself in it so directly as a human being feels himself in it when he dies later; but what he had around him before birth emerges through the whole tableau of life, only a little modified. One could say that this glimpse of certain remnants of the spiritual world that one has experienced before birth is only lost after death, when one has passed the age of thirty-five.

One should never – and this is said in parenthesis – be tempted, I emphasize this expressly, to indulge in the not-at-all-harmless thought of what might be better for a person: to die before the age of thirty-five, or to die after the age of thirty-five and to live through what we will describe. These thoughts should not be pursued, they should not be entertained, but they should be considered: when one passes through the gate of death, one should, in the strictest sense of the word, leave it solely and entirely to karma.

But it is important to understand these things. If one dies after the age of thirty-five, there is no possibility of seeing anything of the remainder of the spiritual life preceding birth. That is obscured. But the tableau of life still appears. One has a strong feeling that one is creating it from within, that one is weaving it oneself, as it were; but this web is brought to life. In this way, dying before the age of thirty-five and dying after the age of thirty-five differ quite significantly in terms of the tableau of life. The life tableau before the age of thirty-five has much more the character of something that comes to you from outside, as if from a spiritual world, and you only push towards it what you yourself have experienced. The tableau of life after thirty-five years is such that at first more of an emptiness, a darkness, comes towards you from the outside, and you bring what you have acquired in life towards this darkness. But it is no less vividly ignited by this. Our inner experience is modified by the fact that one moment it is like the approach of a mirage that we approach, while the other moment we carry our world into the world of the cosmos. All this has great significance for life, as we shall see tomorrow. This karmic process, whereby our physical body is snatched from us at a certain age of physical life, has a great significance for the nature of life after death. But this is intimately connected with our entire karma.

Then comes the time when we feel: Now you are actually out of the earthly. If you want to be very rough, you could say that as soon as you pass through the gate of death, you have the feeling that the earthly body is leaving you. The friends, the people you were with, are leaving you. The experiences you had with them are leaving you. You are alone with yourself for a while, alone with what you have experienced. Of course, everything you have experienced with people is included in the dream of your life; you look at it as what people have engraved in you, but in such a way that you live within yourself during the day and bring the dream of your life to life within yourself. You get the impression that the earth is also leaving you, but that you are still living in the same sphere as the earth, in the sphere that still belongs to the earth. And the laying down of the etheric body is actually also experienced in such a way that one has the feeling: now you are not only out of the earth and its substance, but also out of what is the most immediate environment of the earth, out of the light; you are also out of what, on earth, as dense substantiality, makes the music of the spheres inaudible. You are – this is perhaps the last impression, which is very significant, which is then something lasting – you are no longer in the habit of having external light illuminate you and your surroundings, so to speak. I note, as if to interject, that the most foolish idea is held by those who believe that if one were to fly away from the Earth toward the Sun, one would fly continually through light. This fantastic notion is currently held by materialistic physicists. The belief that the sun spreads light in the way it is described in physics, that light passes through space and falls on the earth, is one of the worst superstitions. After death, one realizes this by realizing, when one is free of the etheric body, that only in the area that belongs to the earth, that is what we have as sunlight here in physical life. One has the perception: Now this light no longer disturbs you. Now it is the inner generation of the light that spreads out in the first sounding through. The inner light can now become effective because the outer light no longer disturbs the inner.

And now, with the shedding of the etheric body, the entry into that world begins, which is so often called the world of kamala. We will call it the soul world, because after the inner life-giving power has first emerged, one then experiences something like an inner resounding of what one is, since one is now alone with oneself. And after the inner illumination, what appears to be an inner warming occurs. Here on earth, one is warmed by receiving warmth from outside and feels dependent on it in the physical body. And now the inner warming occurs, and this warming is such that one now feels again: You are now able, in the element in which you live, to evoke in yourself the sensation that you also had earlier, but in the form: warmth affects you. — This permeates the tableau of life with warmth. As a result, one enters a completely new element. One has the feeling that the etheric body is now leaving one. And that is precisely the entrance into the world that in my book “Theosophy” was called the world of the blaze of desire, because the warmth that arises from within is at the same time desire, generating, flowing desire, feeling of the element of will. And into this, there already mingles that which remains with us for a certain length of time: the experience of the soul world, which I have often described. We can only describe these things more precisely bit by bit, as a reliving of life. One proceeds from the experience of death back towards birth. And now one relives from the other side everything that one has gone through in physical life. But you do not experience it in the same way as you experienced it here in the physical world, but you experience it in a moral way. If, let us say, at some point between birth and death you have harmed someone, you felt at the time what you did, but not the suffering that the other person felt. Now you experience the same thing again, but not what you yourself experienced in terms of anger or antipathy, but rather how the other person experienced it. You extend your own experience, if I may put it this way, to the effects of his actions that occurred between birth and death. You live yourself into all the effects of the actions.

This is, in a sense, the basis of life between death and a new birth: that one gradually immerses oneself in what one has done between birth and death during the experience in the soul world, that one gradually submerges oneself in it. Just as one gradually lived into nature here from childhood, learning to perceive nature and understand nature, so in the time after death one lives into the effects of one's own deeds, into the effect of one's own thoughts and words, in short, into the entire world of effects; one pours oneself into the world of effects. Of course, spiritual beings gradually emerge from this background: the beings of the higher hierarchies, the beings of the elemental world. Just as we do not merely experience nature here, but animals, plants and minerals emerge from the soil of nature, so within this reliving, where we live into the effects of our deeds - for that is actually the basic soil of our world - the spiritual beings in the spiritual world emerge. And there, as in the physical world, physical beings come to meet us among the spiritual beings of the elemental realms and the higher hierarchies, the souls that have been connected to us, the souls that have already died and are in the spiritual world, or the souls that are still embodied in the physical body, with whom we have had contact here. With all this, this basic ground of the after-mortal being, this dissolving into the world of one's own deeds, comes to life.

And in a certain way, it can be perceived that there is a difference between perceiving a soul that is still on earth and a soul that has already passed through the gate of death. The dead person naturally knows whether he is dealing with one soul or the other. When he is dealing with a soul that still dwells in the earthly body, then the dead person has the feeling that this soul is approaching him more from the outside, that the image, the imagination, forms itself. With a soul that already belongs to the disembodied, there is a much more active experience. You have the feeling that the soul is approaching you, but that you have to form the image for this soul. The dead person comes to you with his being, you have to form his image yourself; the person who is still alive brings you his image when you look down on him.

And so now, in a certain way, one experiences with moral emphasis what one can call one's deeds, that is, the effects of what one has done, thought, wanted. There one plunges in, there one lives oneself into it. And one plunges in in a very specific way, namely in such a way that one experiences, for example, that one has hurt someone, and now one experiences what the other has experienced through the injury! This is really your own experience of what the other person experienced here in the physical world. You go through it. And by going through it, the strength arises in you, as if by inner, elementary necessity: You have to make up for that, you have to make amends for that! It is really the case that you can use the comparison: A mosquito flies towards you, you close your eyes. You carry out an activity under an impression. After death you experience the effect of something you have done; then you respond by generating the strength to make amends, that is, to compensate for what you have done to the other person. This means that by reliving this experience in your soul, you take upon yourself the strength to make amends for what you have done to this person. This creates the desire to be with him in earthly life in order to balance out what was done to him. During this reliving, all the forces for karma are created, for balancing karma. One takes them on.

So already in these first years or decades after passing through the gate of death, one creates the living out of karma. And as true as there is a growing power in the germ, which only later realizes itself in the blossom, it is as true that already now, in the time after passing through the gate of death, the power exists in the dead as root power, which then remains for the whole life between death and a new birth, and which realizes itself in the new earth life or in later earth lives as karmic compensation for what one has done. Thus the will is generated, which then becomes unconscious will for karma.

And now we can take a closer look at something that is important for the understanding of this picture of life between death and a new birth. We can see this if we cast our eyes once more on the reciprocal action between the conditions of earthly life here, which are well known to us in their outer appearance and on which we have reflected many a time, and their inner secrets, when we look at the reciprocal action between the waking life of the day and the sleeping life of the night.

Today, we want to look at this waking and sleeping again from a certain point of view. From an external point of view, sleep consists of our I and astral body being outside the physical and etheric bodies. The life of sleep initially remains unconscious if it is not interspersed with a certain type of dream life. However, this does not mean inactivity. On the contrary, this life in sleep is a soul life that is much more active within than the waking soul life, even though it remains unconscious during normal life on earth. The waking life of the soul is only so intense because the activity of the ego and the astral body experiences resistance from the aetheric body and the physical body. In this mutual pushing and shoving between the ego and the astral body on the one hand, and the physical and etheric bodies on the other, something develops that resembles continuous pushes and counter-pushes. This is what appears to us as an alert day-life, while in normal life on earth we are not yet able to bring the continuous but intense activity of the night-life to consciousness. This does not push against the physical and etheric bodies, so it does not become conscious. But in itself the day-life is weaker; it only becomes conscious through the fact that it continually beats against the etheric body and physical body. This beating is perceived, while the more intense activity of the life during sleep goes into the indefinite, cannot beat against anything and thus remains unconscious.

But what is a person actually doing during this 'dream life'? When dreams occur in normal life, these dreams are not the actual activity during sleep, but are actually a visualization of the activity through the memories of ordinary life. The images of dream life arise because life spreads its tapestry over the actual inner activity; and in this way many things are perceived in 'dream life'. There the I and the astral body are in a living activity; when this touches the etheric body and the human being touches the etheric body, the dream arises. But the dream uses the physical life memories from the etheric body to make visible the invisible activity of the ego and the astral body. Therefore, one can only understand the dream if one takes these images in terms of their character sequence, that is, if one learns to understand these images. “Dreams must first be read in the right way, the right art of interpretation must first be added. Then, however, they point to this most significant reality, which is carried out by the ego and the astral body during sleep. This activity, then, which the human being carries out, is revealed to serious and dignified spiritual research.

What exactly is this activity that takes place from the moment we fall asleep until we wake up? It consists of reliving the experiences of the day in a much more intense way, so that one becomes, as it were, one's own judge of the day's experiences. It is a trite expression, but deeply true: during the day, one lives into the normal consciousness, letting the events that take place around one wash over one. But at night, in the astral body, one takes the events of the day much more seriously, much more meaningfully, both intellectually and emotionally. One weighs them, examines them in terms of their cosmic value. One concerns oneself with what they mean in the context of the whole world. An immense inner thoroughness in the contemplation of life is poured out upon the activity from falling asleep to waking up; only in normal life it remains unconscious. All this, what man goes through every night like a reliving of the day's life, has a great significance as preparation for life after passing through the gate of death.

Consider, then, with the means of ordinary physical consideration, this continuous life between birth and death. Of course, one only says that one remembers back to a certain point in time in this life. In truth, one does not remember the whole life back, but one remembers in the evening what goes on until the morning. Then the memory breaks off. Then comes the previous 'day', and then the night, which one does not remember. So one remembers back, but it is, as it were, chain link on chain link, a white and a black link. One does not remember the night in the life between birth and death. The strange thing is that in this time when you are in the realm of the soul, you remember the way you relived your daytime experiences night after night during the nights. Here in physical life you remember your days; in the realm of the soul you remember the same, but you remember how you worked through and lived through the days in the nights. You retrace your nights. In this way you can see the whole nature of the experiences in the soul realm.

If you realize this in detail, it is like this: you met a person on a certain day of your life, you experienced something with him. You relive it not only with him during the day, but also at night, and in the following nights; then it is a kind of reminiscence. You experience it inwardly in the ego and astral body. Everything you have experienced here in your waking consciousness, you experience again in your night consciousness. And the way you have experienced it in your night consciousness gives you the handle for how you need it in the soul world. You relive your nights. This is a very significant truth of spiritual research, and one can always remember through such a thing the fact that spiritual research is not as many believe. Many believe that once one has entered the spiritual world, then the spiritual researcher suddenly knows the whole spiritual world and is informed about everything. This belief is just as naive as it is naive to believe that someone who has walked across one part of the earth knows the whole earth. He knows parts of the earth quite well, but he knows nothing about other parts of the earth. Equally, someone who knows the spiritual world at some point does not need to know everything about the spiritual world. That is the subject of a slow research. That is why it is so difficult to talk about spiritual science, because you keep running into this prejudice. When lectures on spiritual science are given, people demand in the question and answer session that information be given about all things. Such questions are to be judged in the same way as if, for example, someone had become acquainted with a certain number of minerals or plants and one would then ask him about the secrets of the animal world and say: He knows one thing, so he must know the other too!

It is quite the case that all the details of the spiritual world must first be worked out. And above all, one must be able to wait until one thing or another arises. Now you have been able to see that in my “Occult Science” and “Theosophy” I have spoken about the approximate length of the so-called Kamalokalebens, the life in the soul world. From a certain point of view, one can say that, as it has happened. But now the spiritual researcher comes to a certain context that can really be compared to traveling from country to country. One comes from one place to another, and so one comes here from one area to another. Thus, the spiritual researcher can come to a different point of view; and this point of view answers the question: What does the activity of the ego and the astral body during the night involve? The experiences of the night can be seen as a reprocessing of the day's experiences. The question may arise: How does life turn out in the soul world when we know that the nights are lived through in the soul world? I have stated that life in the soul world makes up about a third of the last life on earth. If you live through the nights, how long will life in the soul world last? Well, you sleep through about a third of your life here on earth; some people sleep more, others less, but you sleep through about a third of your life on earth.

So are the tremendously significant impressions one can have regarding the truth of spiritual science. Because that is how it is in spiritual science: something is given to you from a certain point of view, from which you look into the spiritual world. A truth arises. One could doubt this truth. Now one starts from a different point of view and comes to the same truth, as is the case now with the experience of the Nights. This is the result of the truth. This is an important criterion, this inner agreement. And you will find this everywhere in spiritual science, where it is seriously and worthily pursued: that the same thing is sought from different points of view, and that the same truth emerges from these different points of view. Once people develop a feeling for the truth value inherent in this way of approaching spiritual truth and then finding this spiritual truth, they will also sense how much more true it is than anything that can be investigated in the physical world. The important thing is that we have a memory here in physical life for what we have experienced in our waking consciousness, and that we have a memory in the time when we pass through the soul world for what is further worked on during the nights on the basis of what the waking consciousness experiences.

In order to approach the meaningful truths that we will discuss tomorrow with the right attitude, let us recall something that I have already mentioned here in a different context with reference to the great events of our time: When a person passes through the portal of death in such a way that their life is, as it were, torn away from the outside, especially if they die at a young age, then after they have passed through the portal of death, after a short time, the separation of the etheric body also occurs. But this etheric body would have the power to supply the rest of life with external life forces. Normally, the person receives the powers of the etheric body that can supply them with life forces into old age. If life is suddenly interrupted, then these powers remain. These powers are also present in the discarded etheric body. And just as nothing of the forces is lost in the physical world, but only transformed, so these forces are not lost either, but remain present. Apply this specifically, then you will say to yourself: When a person dies in his youth, in his prime, he leaves the world what he still has of vital forces in his ether body, which he could have used up himself. Imagine it even more concretely. Suppose a person, let us say in the twenty-fifth year of life, is struck by a bullet: he leaves to the world in terms of etheric forces of life that which he would have been able to use up from the twenty-sixth year of life onwards for the rest of a long life. That remains, that is a gift that the dead leave to the spiritual atmosphere of life in which we find ourselves. We remain surrounded by these forces. And in these forces lie the sacrificial attitudes with which the departed person permeated his etheric forces. That remains. And future generations have no idea how they actually live in the forces left by their ancestors in this way, how they are surrounded by them, and how our spiritual life air is imbued with them. They pay no attention to what is left behind by the departed in such a time, when so many etheric bodies that can still be used in life are given back to the spiritual atmosphere of the earth in a relatively short period of time. We will continue from there tomorrow.

We will now direct our attention to what can be revealed to us from such profound connections, through which we can see into the spiritual world, and no longer see the spirit in a merely abstract, trivial way, even hazily in the world of the senses, but see the spiritual essence in a concrete way. In addition to the fates of those who have passed through the gate of death, we see beings of the higher hierarchies and of the elemental world. But we also see what remains inwardly connected to the earth: that which is left in the etheric bodies. What the souls who meet their death in the great fields of battle leave behind in the way of unused etheric forces will have a definite effect. These will combine with the understanding that the children of the earth will show for the future. And looking at this, we say what we have often said at the end of our meditation:

From the courage of the fighters,
From the blood of the battles,
From the suffering of the abandoned,
From the people's sacrificial deeds
Will grow spiritual fruit
Guiding souls, spiritually aware
Their minds into the spiritual realm.

This evening we want to use to reflect on the interaction between the spiritual and physical worlds. This has already been the subject of other reflections in recent days. It will be the main point on which we will depend to further develop the topic that we have raised. But I would like to start from a more general consideration, which will show us how, in the more abstract, in the more general, the interaction of the spiritual and the physical, the unearthly and the earthly, can be thought of, can be encompassed by a simple thought. And from this more general consideration, we will then move on to what is important: the relationship of the disembodied human being, who has passed through the gate of death, to those people who are embodied in this earthly life.

Let us look at our Earth as the scene of what is expressed to our senses first. I will begin quite hypothetically, will propose thoughts and ideas that are initially just thoughts, or at least appear to be just thoughts. Let us assume that all the forces of our Earth, from a certain point of view, are concentrated and compressed into a small image of the Earth, in some way shaped. So let us assume that we have a small Earth, a small, tiny body, but one that contains in miniature the same forces as the Earth in the large. Let us visualize this schematically. Let us imagine that we have a small Earth, that is, a small, tiny body that contains within itself the same power relationships that are otherwise distributed throughout the large volume of the Earth's body. Let us imagine that this small Earth body is somehow connected to the Earth.

Now, if we imagine the earth correctly, we do not have to think of it as just any inanimate being, as it presents itself to the geologist, the mineralogist, who only imagines this earth as an inanimate being. Because if the earth were only mineral, as the geologist imagines it, it would never be able to harbor plants, animals, human beings on it. Of course the geologist is right to isolate what is dead, but he should be aware that this is only one aspect of the earth's existence. If, however, we imagine the earth as a living being, then we must also imagine that its life undergoes changes over time. So that this earth in winter — we have discussed this often — is in a very different state than in summer, just as a person is in a different state when asleep than when awake. We must not imagine that winter and summer simply brush over the earth, but that they are something that takes hold of the state of the earth, that is, the living being, just as the states of waking and sleeping take hold of us. This temporal sequence is therefore part of our earthly existence if we regard this earthly existence as a living one. But with this we also say that every being that is connected with this earth – and that includes this small earth we are talking about here – is in this changing state with the whole earth, that it shares in it.

What does this change of conditions mean for our earth? Let us say, for example, that spring is coming. When spring comes, it means that the sun's effect on the earth is quite different from that during the winter. We could also say: When spring arrives, the earth is seized by the effects of the sun. During the winter, when our little earth with the great earth was, so to speak, dependent on itself, when the sun did not care about our little earth, now our little earth is also seized by the effects of the sun, by what is outside of our earth. The sum of forces in the little earth is snatched from the earth. Our little earth is, so to speak, no longer dependent on the earth alone; it is claimed by the sun, it is snatched from the earth. Yes, when our little earth is snatched from the earth in this way, then other forces than mere earthly forces play into our little earth, then the external forces communicate with our little earth.

Now we have to imagine this small earth lined with substances. What a substance is is not considered here. From autumn to spring, this small earth is alone with itself, and so it can develop its forces within itself. But then comes the sun, which draws out the forces, so that under the influence of the sun's effect, what was first enclosed in our little earth now comes into extra-terrestrial spheres of activity. It is torn out and comes into extra-terrestrial spheres of activity. That which was compressed can expand and also acquires a relationship to the surrounding cosmic space under the influence of the sun.

Now, after a certain time, towards autumn, the effects of the sun cease again. Then this development cannot take place, and the forces of the sun's effect withdraw from the forces of the earth's effect, that is to say, this combination of forces is restored. It gathers the substance together: the earth takes back, as it were, what it had to leave to the sun for a certain period of time. The effects of the sun now cease for a while, winter comes. If this were left to the earth, the sun would completely take possession of the small earth within the great earth. During the whole of the winter the system of earth forces must be active within. Otherwise the sun would take possession of this small earth entirely for itself. It must be ensured that when the sun reappears it can take hold of this small earth; otherwise it will simply become a tiny ball that is consumed by the great earth. A force must assert itself so that the sun, when it comes, can reach this small earth again. But precautions must be taken for this.

If the earth has its own power only in this one inside it (it is drawn), then that is just a small earth. The sun has retreated, now this small earth is alone with the large earth. When the sun comes again, what should it do now with what has become mere earth? In reality, the sun must be able to reach in again – there is no difference here, whether the sun goes around the earth or the earth around the sun – the sun, when it is in a new relationship to the earth, must be able to reach in. You can imagine it in the following way: Imagine a person standing firmly in one place and using all his strength to remain standing. You approach from the side and try to push him over. If he has enough strength within him to stand, you will not be able to move him. But when it begins to move, you will be able to intervene in its direction of movement. Suppose there were a force inside it that would cause the orbiting movement of the sun, or of the earth itself, like an inner momentum; let us assume that the sun would communicate this momentum to the small earth: then the sun could in turn intervene in this movement that it has imparted. In this way, it could snatch this small Earth from the Earth, and the process could take place as described. In other words, towards spring we would have a small Earth in which the Sun intervenes through impulses of motion that it had already imparted the previous fall. The Sun intervenes, snatches the small Earth from the mere forces of the Earth, and, in accordance with the effect of the Sun, unfolds on a larger scale that which is limited only to the small Earth. The forces must contract, and the small globe of the earth must be given the momentum of the sun. You already suspect what it is: I have described in sketchy terms what happens during the growth of plants, the unfolding of plants into leaves, flowers and fruits. I have described to you here the participation of the sun's momentum: that is fertilization; the seed is fertilized and remains so until the following year, when it is again seized by the sun. The little grain that carries out the fertilization in the plant is the being in which, through the sun's maturation, the possibility is laid to convey this momentum to the earthly part.

You see, we have here a living interaction between the earthly and the extra-terrestrial. We cannot imagine that the plant's growth continues to flourish without the sun leaving it a replica of its momentum, in which it can engage again the following year. In other words, when we look at the plant, we are really not just looking at something that is connected with the workings of the earth; rather, we see in the whole cycle of the plant process an interaction between the sun and the earth. There are other planetary conditions to be considered, but we will disregard these for now in order to grasp the meaning of the whole process. We want to visualize how what we see on earth is not just an earthly product, but also a product of the sun. The fact that human knowledge is usually limited to what goes on inside and outside on earth prevents us from gaining a real insight, from truly understanding things. For with mere earthly forces, only our minerals are formed. The moment we go beyond the merely mineral into the vegetable, we must say that in the earthly itself there are no longer any forces that shape things.

The materialists always hope that one day they will be able to produce a plant seed in the laboratory, just like any other chemical composition. The point of the opposition to materialism is not this production, but rather that, by advancing from the mineral to the plant, from the chemical product to the living, the production can only take place through a supernatural process. And before they will succeed in realizing this ideal of materialism, in producing plant seeds just as they do mineral products, chemical substances, the materialists will have to learn – if I may express myself grotesquely – to believe in astrology, to believe that they must place a process that they want to bring about under the influence of the stars. Laboratories will have to be set up that work with the changing seasons and that take into account the constellation of the stars in the same way that the constellation of the stars is taken into account in nature. One must rise from the earth when one rises from the dead to the living. For the etheric-physical must also be involved in the creation of the living. This, however, is never dependent on the merely earthly, but on that which is spread throughout the whole world. When we survey our earthly surroundings, we survey what is merely physical; from the earthly point of view, we survey the physical by surveying the earthly. That which is ethereal to our earth is still exposed to the entire universe.

If we now go further to the astral, we come to an element that is no longer exposed to the visible at all. And if I were to develop this for the animal kingdom in the way I developed it for the plant kingdom, it would turn out to be more complicated; but you would see that not only the extra-terrestrial and the still visible in the starry world come into consideration, but that the supersensible comes into consideration at all, which is not even concluded in the starry world. One must go out of the realm of the visible.

I wanted to make such a consideration before you, so that you gain insight into the really deep inner mystery of what is going on in the everyday, in the daily growth of plants, so that you gain insight into how it is in the fertilizing grains of the plant , which are distributed in a circle or in some other pattern around the ovary, it is essential that they contain extraterrestrial effects, and that the seed itself is essentially a reflection of the whole earth effect, that it is a small earth. The interaction that takes place in the plant blossom through fertilization is a reflection of the process that takes place between the earth and the entire starry world of the surrounding cosmic space.

We are fundamentally surrounded by secrets everywhere, and knowledge and the pursuit of knowledge always inspire the deepest humility. Just imagine how far it is from the general view of such a thing to the concrete view of the details of all that covers the

4419 earth. The field of knowledge thus truly opens up as an infinite one. We are confronted with infinity at every point of our existence, so to speak. And it is part of the right attitude that a person should develop towards the world to have a sense that one is actually looking into an infinite existence everywhere. But through this one also feels a certain bond between the individual finite human existence and the infinite, the whole world. And this mood should actually be poured out over everything that spiritual science can bring us, because without this reverent mood towards the infinite, nothing can actually be grasped with the right feeling in spiritual science. From time to time, one must renew such a mood within oneself, so that one ceases to regard knowledge as something that is sought after on the side, as it were, in the course of life, while in fact it must belong to the most sacred spiritual that intervenes in our lives.

If we give ourselves up to such moods, then we will also receive with the right attitude that which will increasingly have to be proclaimed in our time from the sources of spiritual science for the progress that must necessarily come into the world from our present time into the future. And when we have developed such an attitude, then this attitude is something effective in our soul. It is really not just something abstract, but it takes hold of our soul, it warms and illuminates our soul. And only when this happens can the right thing emerge from spiritual science, when our soul becomes, as it were, a different one, when what can be explored through spiritual science is felt through. When we bring such an attitude into our soul, then we can approach the riddles of life in the right way, which otherwise flow past us in life without us being able to relate to them in the right way.

There is really an inner connection between the soul and these general considerations, which I have now made, and what I now want to say with regard to human life. If you look at the plant, if you see it sprouting from the earth, you can tune your soul so that you feel: What is sprouting as greenery comes from such a complicated little creature, the seed, that this little being – from certain points of view – is a reflection of the whole earth, that in what I see sprouting from leaf to flower, from flower to fruit, the whole universe is involved. When I look at a green plant leaf on its stem, I realize that in this leaf, the way it is positioned, the way it greens, what was first enclosed in the small earth is enveloped by the effects of the sun, what has been wrested from the earth until the effects of the sun have taken hold of it. Then the effects of the sun, however, leave behind their vibrational impulses, after they have made it impossible for that which was in the small earth to spread when it must contract again. We see, as it were, in the sprouting, unfolding plant an image of certain effects of the whole great cosmos. We must regard what presents itself to our senses in this way as something that reveals to us in every point secrets that permeate and interweave the whole cosmos.

In this way, human life itself is also connected with the whole cosmos and now also with what is there in relation to us of the extraterrestrially visible bodies and processes. But what appears in earthly processes is particularly significant to us when we consider, I would say, the deviations from what we see as normal earthly life, normal human life. It is true that we constantly see many more deviations than what is actually normal in life, but ordinary cognition, which is limited to the sense world, does not engage with these deviations; one might say that it does not engage with the meaning of these deviations. We live in a time in which, crowded together, many deviations present themselves to us, which at the same time are real riddle questions. Do we not see in this time of severe trial for humanity numerous of our human brothers going prematurely through the gate of death? We see them going through the gate of death not through some kind of illness, something that is in their own organism, but we see them forcibly going

go through this gate of death. Because it is something else whether a human soul goes through the gate of death so that she dies of an illness in her youth or because her organism is hit by a bullet or is forcibly taken away from the soul-spiritual in any other way. But I already spoke about it yesterday: What takes place here between birth and death is all significant in the context of life as a whole; we have to accept it as karmic connections, we have to fit into the karma as it is given. But what happens is significant.

Now let us consider the case of the physical organism being taken away from the soul-spiritual by a bullet at a relatively young age. Compared to what we have become accustomed to — that the human being consumes his own organism — this is an abnormality. It is therefore a twofold mystery. If death alone is a mystery for direct contemplation, which is revealed through spiritual science, a twofold mystery arises when the course of life is not such that the organism is taken away from the spiritual soul through inner organic processes, but when this happens through a bullet.

Facing the universe, the cosmos, an inner mood arises in the soul that is created by such simple considerations, but which, grasped in all its depth, seizes us with an inner mood in relation to the secrets of the universe. And then, when the soul is so moved, we also approach the event that I have just hinted at with the necessary reverent mood and dignity and with the necessary seriousness: that the physical-bodily is forcibly taken away from the human spiritual-soul. And then this question arises before our soul like a riddle. Because how such a question arises determines whether or not one can contribute something to its solution. If a person has just had a banquet and then rested and now sits down to his spiritual work, then he will not solve the deep riddle, then he will not find the mood that matters. But when he faces the riddle and his soul is imbued with the right attitude towards the universe, then the riddles can be solved.

When the spiritual researcher, with such a mood of the soul, faces the riddle of death, which approaches us in such a way that the physical body is violently snatched from the soul-spiritual, then all kinds of things arise in the soul that can contribute to solving the riddle. Then the right impressions come, which are needed to clarify such a matter. These impressions cannot arise from every frame of mind, but only from the right one. In order to make this vividly clear to you, I have chosen this particular path today, by showing you, as it were, how such a task presents itself to the spiritual researcher. When the spiritual researcher is in the right frame of mind, the enigmatic question arises before him. But then something quite different arises: just as thoughts usually follow each other in a lawless manner, so now an impression arises before the soul in a law-governed manner, alongside the question. And then, if one has sensed this riddle, the riddle of death, one can sense the other question as something that belongs to it: Yes, how do people actually – depending on their particular nature – accept life? And all kinds of thoughts arise, thoughts that I now want to spread out before your soul itself.

Especially in our present time cycle, people only really accept something as reality if it is not a “mere thought”. For them, thought is not really something real. And they may be right from their point of view, but it is just a certain mood of the soul. That which is real must approach man much more strongly than a mere thought. A mere thought is just that — a mere thought! But for modern man, that which is designated as being must on no account be a mere thought. What presents itself as a mere thought, that is what man today calls non-existent. That which exists must place itself firmly in the world, must not speak merely to the thought. Out of this mood, people only believe that they are standing in reality when they can speak of this reality as an existing being, when they are forced to recognize this reality through being.

Now, when we ascend from this world in which we live to the spiritual world that man inhabits when he has passed through the gate of death, the most uncomfortable thought is, one might say, the thought of the being that formed here in the physical world. A being that is like the being in the physical world disturbs the disembodied person in the spiritual world. Precisely what is here in reality called the unreal in contrast to the existing is the real in the spiritual world. If something were to approach you there as it does here in the material world, you would reject it. It would startle you and be something that does not belong in the spiritual world. This is an extremely significant thought. If one were to talk as trivially in the spiritual world as one does here, a spirit might say, when something approaches it as it does here: What am I supposed to do with it? That's not it at all! — Because in the spiritual world I must have the opportunity to experience everything that comes to me as an imagination — it is at the lowest level of knowledge in the spiritual world — that is, to be able to translate it into intuition through my own activity. While in our time people only recognize as reality what they have done nothing for, one cannot

'recognize this in the spiritual world. Rather, in the spiritual world, one must do something to help bring about what is to appear there as reality. One must always work together.

It is the case that a disembodied person in the spiritual world sees the spiritual world around them to the extent that they are active in it. And what they see when they are not active is the world beyond, the world that is our world here. When the disembodied person looks at the earth, they see what is there without them being involved. Just as we on earth call our visible world, our real world, our existing world the here and now and what cannot be seen the hereafter, it is exactly the other way round from the point of view of the spiritual world. In the spiritual world there is absolutely nothing except what we create out of nothing into the present by participating: That is then the here and now. Otherwise, this world in the spiritual world is dark and silent and desolate if we do not act spiritually and mentally in it. But the hereafter is there without us working. While we look up here to the unknown, we look from the spiritual world at what is familiar to us here, but that is precisely the hereafter, which has no reality because it is, without one doing anything to it. — One must familiarize oneself with such ideas.

Now there is something within our physical world, our physical reality, that not everyone, but certain people, accept as something meaningful, despite the fact that it is not real. It is something that individual people bring into this reality, and in contrast to this, those who have an understanding of it behave in such a way that they accept it, despite the fact that it has no real existence: These are the ideals that people have. Idealists bring something valuable into our sensual reality: the ideals by which people live, which have no material reality, and which only the coarse materialist does not accept. But at the same time, these ideals are something of immense value in this life. They are the ideals that give us the impetus for our lives, they are what we desire so that we can hold to them. In a certain respect, these ideals make life valuable in that man lives up to them. Something unreal in the materialistic sense must be carried into our sensual reality with the ideals, so that what we must characterize in the sense does not arise: mere existence would be bleak if ideals were not there, if man did not find them in them. Among those who have no ideals, there must be idealists who, as it were, develop something in our reality that is an image of the reality beyond, that is not an existing thing, that does not claim the existing and yet is a valuable thing, indeed, has an absolute value.

After the spiritual researcher has developed this impression, which is natural to him, his research leads him back to the riddle of the human being hit by a bullet in his youth. And he must now ask: Is there something for the world beyond, in which the disembodied human beings and spiritual beings live, that corresponds to idealism here on earth? Is there something similar for the beings in the hereafter as the ideals here on earth? And lo and behold, the following emerges. Take a person who was shot at a young age: his etheric body separates from the physical body, the physical body has gone in a violent way. Of course, the violence must come from outside. What I have said can never apply when it is a matter of one's own decision. The process must come from outside. The etheric body, as I have already emphasized, has forces within it that could have continued to supply life for decades, perhaps even for decades, here on earth. These forces do not disappear, they remain. The person who now discards his etheric body in this way hands over the forces of his etheric body to the general world. But he has entered the spiritual world in the manner indicated, or rather, his body has been taken from him. So he now ascends into the spiritual world as a disembodied soul. Something of him remains in the physical world that he could have used up himself but did not use up. Consider what is at hand here! The human being in question ascends into the spiritual world without having used up anything that he could have used up.

We now turn our attention to the individuality of the human being itself. The human being ascends into the spiritual world without having consumed something that he could have consumed. Thus he ascends into the spiritual world with something that could have been real down here in the physical world, but did not become real in the external sense. Those people who entered the physical world with the potential for prolonged use of the etheric body here, but did not experience this use, come up to the spiritual world differently than those who have used up this etheric body by the end of their existence. They come up having incorporated into this earth something that could have been, but did not become. But this causes a mood in them, through which they become something similar for the spiritual world as the idealists here are for the physical world. So the one who passes through the gate of death in this way enters the spiritual world by bringing in something that is idealism there for the spiritual world, which is similar to the ideals that are brought into the physical world here by the idealists. A meaningful context of life!

So in such martyrdom times as the present one, souls enter the spiritual world that have passed through a shorter existence. They have lived here on earth in such a way that something that could have come into existence did not come into being for them, and they enter the spiritual world in such a way that they represent the connection with the earthly world there in the same way that idealists here represent the connection between the earthly world and the spiritual world in their ideals. In other words, these human beings who have passed through the gate of death in this way have the task of proclaiming in the spiritual world that not everything on earth is as coarse as that which is called reality here under ordinary circumstances, that the earth also harbors something that is indeed predisposed to being, but does not live out this being in a coarse way. The fact that such an inner attitude of the soul is also carried up into the spiritual world gives rise, in the time between death and a new birth, to something similar to the idealism that exists here on earth. And if we look at such an age as ours from the standpoint of the wisdom of the world, then we look into the world in such a way that we say to ourselves: Within the whole, wisdom-filled course of the world, we also accept this in such a way that we work our way up to its understanding with reverence. We then recognize that in such ages of martyrdom the spiritual worlds are given in a great, all-embracing sense that which must live with them, just as our idealism must live on earth, so that those who, as such, go up into the spiritual world at all and live through the life between death and a new birth may find something similar in this world to what we find here in idealism. Therefore, these ages must come into being. Whether they must always arise in the future is not a matter for discussion today, because that depends on the way in which the life of knowledge of mankind on earth is spiritualized, not only whether but in what way. No one should draw from what has been said that such ages should necessarily be defended forever; but if one examines their meaning, it becomes clear what has been said for the present time of mankind.

Then we look into the wisdom-filled context of the world and say to ourselves: How does fear and terror, suffering and pain, and what those who pass through the gate of death must necessarily find in the spiritual world fit together? — We see how suffering, pain, blood and martyrdom, which present themselves to us here from one side, look from the other side. One can well imagine that there are people who want to be wiser than the gods and who therefore raise the question: Would the gods not have brought about something in the spiritual world that corresponds to idealism on earth, without having imposed on earth what is imposed on earth in such a martyr age? — Such questions are raised only by those who want to be wiser than the gods. Those who look into the human age in the right way want to understand the world because they are convinced that it must be as it is, and that anything man dreams up about something that would be better for this world could only be worse for it.

We look at the idealists, perhaps at a truly idealistic person in this world; we are perhaps tempted, if we have a sense for ideals, to say: See this man, he brings heaven into the earth, because what is not in the material sense, he brings as something valuable for the existing, as a guiding principle to people! The souls that have normally passed through the gate of death and are going through the life between death and a new birth also see in this life souls that have in some way undergone a sacrificial death, from whom the physical body has been taken from the outside by earthly necessity. They look to these souls as to those who have to proclaim to them that down there on earth there is not only coarse existence, but that, connected with the earth, there are also human tendencies that could be existence and yet do not come to full existence, but instead of consuming this full existence, pass over at an earlier point in their lives between birth and death into the spiritual world.

A significant question arises here, namely, what is the difference between such a violent death and a death caused by an early illness? For what I have said now is nothing but a statement of facts. Precisely those who have ended their physical lives in this way, as described, are, as it were, the idealists of the spiritual world, and they are idealists for the reason that, as can be seen from further observation, the physical body has been taken from them by earthly events, by events that merely belong to earthly life.

When a person undergoes an illness, the body is taken from him by forces other than earthly ones. For consider, even in the growth of plants, not only earthly forces are at work, but extraterrestrial forces also collaborate. This is of course also the case with animals and even more so with human beings. Our illnesses do not come from the earth alone. Death comes to us only from the earth in no other way than when we die a violent death. However death may come, it is never a mere earthly event, unless it be a violent death in the sense indicated. Whether death comes to us through an illness – and suicide is not an earthly event either, since it comes about through a decision of the soul – there is no death that is merely brought about by earthly forces, except that which, through sacrificial deaths, through forces that play on earth, frees the body from the soul-spiritual. So that here earthly forces and relationships enter into reciprocal relationships with that which is spiritual. Otherwise, death is always something that completely transcends the earth; it is never a mere interaction between the earth and what is in the spiritual world. The etheric body, which was early deprived of its activity, is given over to purely earthly conditions, to something that is merely earthly, that is merely earthly events. For death is such — hold what I am about to say together with some of my thoughts these days — that when viewed from the physical side, it appears quite different than when viewed from the spiritual side. I have hinted at this in various ways. But always, when death does not occur in the way I have now indicated, it is something that can be understood from the other side. If one enters the other world through a death from illness, from old age, or through suicide, then one has what is needed to understand death there. If death is caused by a bullet on the battlefield, then one must look at purely earthly conditions to understand it. It is the same with accidents. One must look down from the spiritual world to have been earthly; death is to be explained from earthly conditions. And that makes that one must look down from the here and now of the spiritual world into the hereafter of the physical world in order to understand such a death.

Just as our ideals connect us to heaven, so the heavenly ideals connect these dead to the earth. Therefore, the one who thus passes through the gate of death, in the life between death and new birth, is one who weaves into all that takes place between the human souls that come to be embodied again, that which then results in our earth in spiritual things, which results in our earth in the earth itself also consisting of our thoughts, feelings and not merely of earthly things.

It must be admitted that the characteristics of these things, which I have discussed, are difficult. But it is understandable that this must be difficult, because one speaks with words that are coined for physical conditions about that which extends far, far beyond physical conditions. In any case, it is one thing to look, I would say, dull-witted and uncomprehendingly, at the mysterious nature of such events that emerge from the bosom of history into human life, such as our present difficult time of trial for humanity, and quite another to look at them and say to oneself: What gives meaning to such an event is not only significant for our Earth, but for all life! And in this feeling one is led into the deep meaning and the wisdom of the whole. One gradually learns to sense what must all be involved in order for the human being to be placed in this world in the course of his entire life.

This is what I wanted to suggest in the second mystery drama, from the mouth of Capesius, who speaks of the fact that the thinking of many gods and the cooperation of many gods is necessary to make man appear to all the worlds as their goal. That which in this drama emerges as a world-sentiment from the soul of Capesius, can perhaps become objective if one tries to appropriate such ideas, as we have tried to put them into our souls today. In such personalities as Capesius, such moods arise tragically because they can also arise without one immediately finding the full solution to the riddle. That is one thing to be noted in this connection; the other is that we must always bear in mind how much such study calls upon us to be modest and humble, not proud, not to have human delusions of grandeur.

To appropriate human self-awareness in the right sense means to consciously visualize it inwardly. And when we begin to sense what we can extend our consciousness to, how wide the horizon of the riddles of the world is, we will take care not to fall for the proud thought: O man, how you are actually a summary of the whole cosmos! — I believe that precisely such a thought must be very far from us. On the other hand, the other thought will be close to us: How little we know in our consciousness of what is knowable! — Infinity is necessary to put together the human being; but we have never gone further than knowing a very small piece of it. Modesty and humility are what descends into our soul precisely from knowledge as it expands. One can never learn more about the spiritual world than one already knows without also learning that what can be known is infinite. And the more one knows, the more vividly one senses this infinity. And one learns to understand how a part of life consists in allowing oneself to be seized by the great, mighty riddles and secrets that pulsate through existence.

Much of what humanity must now regain was known by people in ancient times within an ancient wisdom like a heritage. What people possess today has only been gained by this inheritance disappearing from the souls. In order for human souls to acquire this wisdom again, it first had to disappear. It had to disappear so that it could become acquired wisdom. We must work our way up again in order to gain in further earthly lives, in the further existence of the earth, what has disappeared from the souls as inherited wisdom. Thus, we must look into the perspective of the human future; then we will understand the necessity of spiritual science entering the world. It is precisely this living relationship with the infinite, as it has been characterized, that enables us to truly grasp esoteric science as something that is inwardly alive, that is also active and effective in us, and that can make us true co-workers in the shaping of the earth, which we must become if the earth is to develop further.

To reinforce this, I would like to mention one more thing. There are people we should certainly listen to, because they are saying the right thing from the point of view of the present. They say: In earlier times, people did not know what a criminal is, why a person develops as a criminal in the world. Today, however, we know. If you dissect the head of a criminal, you will find that it has a certain characteristic: the occipital lobe does not completely cover the cerebellum, as it does in normal people. It was a great and significant discovery made by Moritz Benedikt, the famous criminal anthropologist, which shows how a certain simple physiology of the occiput determines whether someone is a criminal. So consider: You are a criminal because the posterior lobe does not cover parts of the brain that should be covered! There is nothing to be said against this truth. It is there, and it would be quite foolish to rebel against it, because it is a truth. But think: If you are a materialist, what do you have to say? Well, some people are born with brain lobes that are too small; they are then predestined to become criminals. Consider – I need not elaborate further – the infinite bleakness of such a view of the world! Consider how all human feeling must be changed when one knows nothing but this, and when one must say to oneself: Why do people become criminals? Because that is how nature has placed them in life, so that they cannot help but become criminals. But if one begins to know that the human being has an etheric body, then one knows something else to say about the matter, one knows something else about it. One knows that this ether body encompasses all parts, and that in the case of a person who has a occipital lobe that is too short in the physical sense, the corresponding ether parts can still attain their full development. Whatever the physical condition may be, the correction can also be achieved with the ether body. If we succeed in having a form of education that draws on spiritual science as well as physical science, we can develop an insight into a child's behaviour that enables us to recognise what is needed for its education and what we need to provide so that the ether body develops in such a way that it counteracts the effect of the underdeveloped occipital lobes. Then a person can, even if their hindbrain is not normally formed in the etheric body, still become a good person, even if they are physically predestined to be a criminal. Here you can see how spiritual science can and must practically intervene in life. Because purely physical science must let the criminal brain be a criminal brain, because it is only a science of the physical. But if you take spiritual science into consideration, you paralyze the physical defects. From this you can see what must develop in the future.

And now imagine: this spiritual science did not exist! Then there would never be the possibility of developing the etheric body in the way I have described. That means that anyone born in the future with an atrophied brain will live out their life in a way that corresponds to this brain. There will be no possibility of pedagogically improving this. The consequence of this will be that people will become what their physical organization is capable of. And this will continue forever. And people will reach the state of Jupiter, and the materialists' current dreams will become true. If spiritual science does not overcome what follows from the merely material organization, then people will gradually develop in such a way that this material organization will be decisive; people would then merely be a result of their material development. Because spiritual science intervenes in life, this will not be the case on Jupiter; the etheric body will again transform the physical body. For if in a life in which the physical brain has atrophied due to the karma of earlier lives, the etheric body is properly developed, then in the next incarnation the physical brain will develop properly. These things are all connected. So that spiritual science really becomes a reality, that it transforms humanity again.

” If you summarize these thoughts, you will be able to say to yourself: What the materialists think of man today is not yet reality, because today man is still so predisposed that the spiritual can intervene. But it could become as the materialists think, if it were up to the materialists, if spiritual science could be eradicated by the materialists. If the materialists had their way, people on Jupiter would live as a result of their material organization alone. What are materialists, then? They have a world view that does not correspond to reality today, but which could correspond to reality for people one day. These materialists are prophets, only false prophets! They dream of a world that, if it were up to them, could be created in their image. The materialists are dreamers, but mari must work against their dreams. When people realize that the materialists are dreamers, that they should be told: You go through the world and do not see reality, you dream of an existence that could at best be brought about by your lack of insight into the world, you are false prophets, you make all kinds of fantasies! At that moment materialism will be correctly assessed. So the opposite judgment of what the materialists, well, let's say, dream of themselves, that's what you'll have to have. Then the time will have come when one can really understand spiritual science. In a certain sense, spiritual science will already transform the world from this point of view.

In the last few days, I have tried to give you a few hints about this or that in the context of the physical and spiritual worlds. I have said it out of impulses that arise from the momentous events of our time. At a time when death is so present before the soul, one might say a thousand times a day, such reflections, when offered as a possibility, are indeed close to the human soul. For how could one refrain from searching for the meaning and purpose of existence in such difficult times of trial as these? The fact that we are able to talk about such questions here gives me great satisfaction and allows me to be among you again even in these difficult times. I would just like to add the comment that in the present situation, some things have to be viewed in the context of this present situation. It is not as easy as in peacetime to travel everywhere. Therefore, our members must be aware, as indeed everyone must be aware, that war times are different from normal times, and that we cannot demand everything as we would in normal times. I say this especially with regard to the fact that this is often overlooked, especially by our members, while our members should have a great deal of understanding for our present situation, and should be aware of its context. It has often been shown that our members cannot understand that one must bear in mind the difficult times in which we live and that not everything can happen with the same regularity as usual. But we must hold on to that, so that we are also loyal to our cause. What each of us can do in this time, through the individual branches of our Society working very hard and very thoroughly on our cause, is really done not only for the good of our cause, but for the good of much more.

It is natural that the community must now be looser; the work in our branches must be all the more intensive, especially with regard to deepening our souls. This is what I would like to place especially in your soul and heart at this time and today. Let us each try to remain holy and true to our ideals, especially in this time, to remain holy and true to what has been able to develop as an attitude through spiritual science in the course of time. Spiritual science must prove itself not only in easy but also in difficult times. What can be stated as a truism, but is nevertheless the keynote of all our striving, must now connect itself particularly deeply with our soul: the attempt at a comprehensive grasp of life. In contrast to so much that is now given in the outer world, in the outer world tending towards materialism – often with such one-sidedness – we want to strive for the versatility of life. We want to know that we must guard against every comfortable one-sidedness in every moment, because we face an infinity in every moment.

Some of you may have heard that in a place where our spiritual science is cultivated, it is necessary to talk about all kinds of shortcomings that have arisen here or there. If certain words have been used to offend certain people, we must not fall into the opposite extreme of one-sidedness. I am not saying this now in order to go into these things in more detail, but only as an example. If, for example, people who spoke of all kinds of occult events and experiences did not speak about these experiences in the right way, it must not be concluded from this that in our Society, for example, occult experiences are not the main thing. Of course they are, for we are striving from the external into the internal. Nor was there any need to object to occult experiences as such. But it is important to realize that within our movement, what counts is the level at which these experiences occur. For it is one thing to speak in a certain light-hearted way about occult experiences, and it is quite another to say that one does not want to hear about them at all. We have been talking about the most intimate occult experiences for three days. What is being created in our circle cannot be a mere science of thought. That is not what our society is for. We must not go from one one-sidedness to another.

I would like to draw particular attention to the intimate, to the way our spiritual science is so closely connected to the innermost part of our soul. What matters is that we do not turn our soul into something other than what it was before when we go through spiritual science. And that must also prove itself in difficult times. That is why I wanted to make such observations, which may be suitable for putting us in that reverent mood towards the spiritual life that is appropriate for the true spiritual scientist. Because basically the greatest and the smallest event in life, everything in life, is something that fills us with deep reverence if we are only able to go deeply enough into the spiritual background of this particular event. And even the painful events of life, the smallest and the greatest, can be placed in such a light through spiritual science that their contemplation helps to bring our soul into the right relationship with the wisdom that flows and weaves through the world.

From the point of view of world wisdom, we wanted to look at events in life that are connected with what is happening today in our environment, which is so great, but also so full of trials. If we feel this way about our time, then we feel right about what we wanted to suggest with the words:

From the courage of the fighters,
From the blood of the battles,
From the suffering of the abandoned,
From the people's sacrificial deeds
Will grow spiritual fruit —
Guiding souls, spiritually aware
Their minds into the spiritual realm.

Today I would like to give a spiritual-scientific historical consideration that can be important to us, especially in view of the momentous events we are facing, the events that the whole of European humanity is facing. Next Wednesday, I will then touch on a more intimate matter of the spiritual life of the human being. If some of us may find what we are to consider today seemingly remote, it is only seemingly so and should not be remote, because spiritual science should fill our souls with the deepest attention for everything that can contribute to the understanding of our time. As I said, on Wednesday we will then return to a purely human spiritual-scientific matter.

Today I would like to start with one question. But do not be alarmed, and do not think that by placing this question at the beginning of our deliberations I am in the slightest degree seeking to revive old disputes in our movement. As you will see, it is a completely different matter, although I will start with a question that could easily be misunderstood at first. The question I would like to raise is: Why, especially during this time of war, does Mrs. Besant continue to defame our German movement in her English magazines? Why did she find it necessary, right in the first months of the war, to say that our German movement had only the intention of being a kind of agency for anti-English political aspirations in Germany? Why did she find it necessary to say that this German movement of ours had the intention of bringing about her own – Mrs. Besant's – dismissal as president of the Theosophical Society in order to establish herself in India and from there organize some kind of anti-English, pan-German movement against England? Why does Mrs. Besant continue to spread these slanderous accusations against our German movement during this war in such an ugly manner, and why will she probably continue to do so?

Within our spiritual movement, we need nothing more than to have a clear, insightful view of what is going on in the world. That which can so easily please those who often believe that they are standing firmly within our movement, a certain - forgive the harsh expression - mental somnolence in the face of world events, is a great disadvantage, especially within such a spiritual movement. We must strive to have the clearest possible view of the affairs of our external existence. For nothing could be easier than for all manner of charlatanry and fraud to attach themselves to such a movement within the development of humanity. And since, within the limits that we have often emphasized, a certain amount of trust is needed even among the small group of those who want to understand certain things here, it is also obvious that, seduced by a certain trustfulness, precisely personalities of our movement are, so to speak, clouded by those who do not want to tell them the truth, but only want to graft all kinds of things into their souls, in order to breed a spiritual bodyguard for all kinds of endeavors, which in the proper sense are not truly spiritual endeavors of humanity, so to speak, by the detour of theosophical or other spiritual beliefs.

We have often pointed out the position of the Russian people within the development of the fifth post-Atlantic cultural epoch, and since I have often discussed the relevant matters in this regard here in Stuttgart during this war period, I will not go back over them today, although you can read about them in individual cycles. Rather, I would like to draw attention to the fact that there are certain fundamental characteristics of the Russian people that make this Russian people particularly suitable for entering into the development of the fifth post-Atlantic or even sixth post-Atlantic cultural development in the way often characterized.

First of all, we have a characteristic of the Russian people that could be called an especially extensive adaptability of the soul to anything of a spiritual nature that confronts the Russian person in any way, a certain adaptability of the soul. It is the case that the Russian person is less productive, less creative in his own soul than the Central or Western European person, that he is, as it were, dependent on receiving and on living through intensively what he has received, but not on shaping it independently out of his own resources. Thus you can see how the Russian people received the Byzantine religion and left it at the point it was at when they received it. And today one can still see from the ceremonies of the Russian Church how ancient oriental essence shines through these ceremonies. One can, I would like to say, look through the form of the Russian Church at ancient sacred oriental things and feel this ancient sacred oriental essence.

Compare this with what has occurred in the Occident, where, as you know, in a development of dogma and ceremony that has been repeatedly challenged, there has been a continuous reshaping, transformation, and thus a creative intervention in what was once adopted by the community that then became the Roman Catholic Church, Protestantism, and so on. This adaptability, this receptivity, is to some extent the first fundamental characteristic of the Russian people.

A second fundamental characteristic is a certain dislike on the part of the Russian people for what we call the permeation of life with intellectuality. The Russian person does not like to be constrained by many precisely defined laws in social life. He demands, as it were, a kind of arbitrary existence of the ego. That the intellect spans a network of legality and that the individual then strictly adheres to such forms of intellect in social life, that is what the Russian man, at least practically, does not want to understand, even if he sometimes goes into it theoretically. He asks more about what the ego wants at the moment, based on the inspiration of the moment.

A third characteristic of the Russian people is – Herder, in particular, pointed this out in a thorough manner; the Slavophiles then took up this Herderian view, which is a German view, and developed it to the point of a kind of megalomania – that the Russian people have retained what is generally found in the oriental character, a certain peacefulness. However strange it may sound, it is in the nature of the Russian people, because the Russian people did not make this war as such: it was instigated by those in power. He has a certain peaceableness. He has the deep belief that the way in which Western European religion develops leads to conflict and quarrel. It is not in the character of the Oriental man to wage war against his fellow men because of religious dogmas. It is even a little strange – it is indeed true, but it is true – that people now notice it so strongly in the Turks, who also have this oriental trait, that they do not become aggressive with regard to religious life itself.

As I said, it lies in the faith, in the consciousness of the Russian people. These three qualities, on the other hand, are particularly susceptible to abuse by those who seek to exploit them. It is very easy to use the adaptability of the Russian character, as the Slavophiles did and as the Pan-Slavists are now doing to a great extent, to persuade the Russian people that they are called upon to replace the decrepit, senile European culture, which is decaying and dying, with Russian life instead.

On the other hand, if the second quality I mentioned is misused, one can persuade the Russian people that the whole of Western and Central European culture has become decrepit because of its particular penchant for intellectualism, for a certain rationality, that this Western European culture is devoid of any truly true mystical quality.

And thirdly, if you want to abuse the third quality of the Russian people, which has been mentioned, the most peaceful quality can be perverted by organizing the otherwise peaceful masses and calling them to the bloodiest fight. Because really, the contradictions touch each other in the world, and especially such contradictions as are being discussed here. But what the Russian people have to mean in the development of European culture is not related to what Russian rulers are now making of this Russian people, but to the three qualities mentioned.

. And these three characteristics determine the Russian nature to enter into a certain connection with the Central European and Western European nature. Because the Russian national character is adaptable, it is called upon, first of all, to achieve what we have often spoken of, what it has to achieve in the sixth post-Atlantic cultural period, first of all not through creativity, but through existence. To achieve this, it must absorb what comes to it from the West. I have often spoken of it as a kind of spiritual marriage. Years, even decades before the outbreak of this war, I may say, a kind of marriage that is necessary between the Central European being and the Russian being in terms of spiritual development.

The fact that the Russian people have a certain aversion to intellectualism will make it possible to create certain social institutions with the Russian people that will only be possible if the aforementioned marriage really takes place.

And in a similar way, the Russian national character will have to relate to what can be given within Central Europe in general. Tomorrow, in the public lecture, we will again have to speak of such things that follow from the Central European nature and that must be incorporated as something great, powerful, and everlasting into the whole course of human development. But the Russian people will have to accept what is achieved by the Central European nature. It is not initially self-creative within this post-Atlantic period.

But now, in contrast to this, what can be characterized as the essence of Russian nationality, .the Central European nationality and the Western European nationality, that Western European nationality, which after the reign of Queen Elizabeth of England essentially became a British nationality, an Anglo-Saxon nationality. And among the many results of these momentous events, which of course it is not my profession to somehow color, it will most certainly be the case that the other Western European states, no matter how these events turn out, will gradually become vassals, dependent peoples of England. In particular, the French will experience the bitterest disappointments. But these are not the things that really matter. What matters to us today is to emphasize the great contrast that exists between the Central European character and the Western European, especially the British and Anglo-Saxon character.

There has never been – and this may go unnoticed today by those who do not want to think, who do not want to observe – a greater contrast in world-historical development than this contrast between Central European and Anglo-Saxon natures. Not as if the individual personality could not rise above it. That is not the point; the point is nationality. Of course, when such things are being characterized, it is never meant to imply that the individual Englishman cannot, of course, rise above the things being characterized. We should not think that we have somehow fallen into the errors of our belligerent opponents and that we must now thoroughly vilify the English character because it is different. Of course, it would be necessary to try to gather together all the possible building blocks that would actually be needed to fully understand the contrast I have been hinting at. But this contrast can become clear to us from the point of view of: on the one hand, if we look at the Central European nature, at the heart of which stands the German nature, in relation to the Russian nature of the East, and on the other hand, if we look at the British, French nature in its relationship to the Russian East. There we have one of the greatest contrasts in the development of mankind. I must, however, merely point out to you today some of the things that I will be discussing in tomorrow's public lecture. But I would like the small group of those who belong to the spiritual science movement to understand what will be said in more detail tomorrow more deeply than it can be understood at first, if one does not penetrate deeper into spiritual science.

You see, the Central European nature is one that is national in a completely different way than any other nationality in the whole development of mankind. Take all the Western European peoples: they are national, so to speak, out of the blood. The German is national out of the soul. The German is national in that he constantly strives to lift certain contents of the soul life out of the general soul life and to transplant them into his own soul. That is why we experience something so great within the German character, such as Goethe's works of art, Herder's historical reflection or the world-view efforts of Hegel, Schelling and Fichte.

Even if these things are still little known in wider circles today, they will become known. For, contrary to all opinions expressed about them, I must say that they can become popular, they can be presented in such a way that every child can understand them, despite the fact that this is not believed today. That will happen. Everything that is a genuine German world view grows out of the deepest soul essence of the German people. And a spiritual movement could never arise within the German soul that would be similar in character to the spiritual movements of the West, if it is to be fruitful. We must not overlook this difference, we must face it squarely. Within the German national soul, everything that is the content of spiritual science must stand in harmonious relationship to what the people as such produce. That is why I said last time I was here in Stuttgart: If you look at the world view of Schelling, Fichte and Hegel, it is as if the whole nation were meditating. One always feels placed in the folk, but in the soul of the folk when one speaks of the German folk. One cannot speak of German nationality in any other way than by taking into account the spiritual characteristics of this German nationality, that which must be striven for. And it is impossible within Germanness, as it is possible in England, for science to exist on the one hand and for this science to want to completely ignore faith on the other. That is not possible in the long term within the German nation. The German wants unity. He wants to have a spirituality that can stand fully on the ground of science, and he wants to have a science that knows how to justify itself before the spiritual life.

This contrast is most evident in the Goethean and Newtonian theories of colors. For more than thirty years I have been trying to bring out the Goethean theory of colors in contrast to the Newtonian one. While Goethe's theory of colors arises entirely from the deep interweaving of the soul with the world, Newton's theory of colors proceeds from a mechanical view of the world and strives for nothing else. And physics today is so anglicized that it does not even notice what is at stake in this field, that it naturally considers anyone who takes Goethe's theory of colors seriously to be a fool.

There is a striving towards spirituality within German national character. Therefore, within German national character, one is also obliged to reckon with what has been sought in ardent spiritual striving by the best of this nation, by those whom we have already mentioned and by those whom we will mention again tomorrow, precisely as a path to spiritual science. But then this German national character cannot but strive objectively, turned to the matter itself. This is something that the English or the French cannot understand. The Frenchman wants to have a beautiful word, to have everything shaped into a beautiful phrase, and then he is satisfied. The Englishman wants to ask where the use of knowledge or the like lies. But the fact that the knowledge we strive for is something that must grow out of the soul like a flower out of a plant, without which man does not feel like a whole human being, is something that neither the French — as Frenchmen, of course, the individual is not at issue — nor the Anglo-Saxons understand.

The task of the German soul is to accomplish what has been achieved since the time of the ancient Greeks for the fourth post-Atlantic cultural period, namely to shape the experience of the soul into a world of ideas. And one really does not need to be a nationalist in the narrow-minded sense, but rather a completely objective observer of the development of humanity, to emphasize this. And you know that I have not only emphasized this in the context of this war, but these considerations have been part of what I have been saying among us for years, for a decade and a half.

But the fact that this German essence is so, means that it is called upon, for psychological and objective reasons, to enter into the spiritual marriage with the Russian East. And the cultural task of the future will never be able to be fulfilled in any other way than by the Russian adaptability accepting what can come out of German national character. And all future cultural development is a question of this connection between Central Europe and Eastern Europe.

The situation is different for Western Europe. Western Europe has adopted what the fourth post-Atlantic cultural period has brought and developed it independently, but in the way I have often described: only through the three soul forces: sentient soul, intellectual soul, consciousness soul. What this fourth post-Atlantic cultural period essentially sends out is not productive. In particular, the British folk soul, the Anglo-Saxon folk soul, has the task of developing the consciousness soul, developing that which is primarily oriented towards usefulness in relation to the physical plane.

Hence all the phenomena that we see occurring within Western Europe, especially within the Anglo-Saxon peoples. But now this Anglo-Saxon people in particular instinctively feel that what is actually fruitful is the Central European, essentially the German influence of Central Europe. And those who lead the so-called occult movements of Western Europe, namely the Anglo-Saxon people, know what is at stake. Those who lead the occult movements in the Anglo-Saxon culture are initially filled with two trains of thought. The first train of thought is that they say to themselves: the Roman Catholic essence is gone; that essentially belongs to the fourth post-Atlantic period. The Anglo-Saxon essence must take the place of what was in the Roman cult. And every occultist of a certain kind, that is, every occultist who is steeped in his own nationality, and with the exception of a few, all of them in Anglo-Saxonism, knows — that is, he imagines that he has real knowledge — that the “Anglo-Saxon race”, as he says, must take the place of the Roman essence. This is taught in all occult schools. It is a fixed dogma.

And in the same way, people instinctively know that, to a certain extent, the recruits for the introduction to life of everything that culture must bring, the recruits who must absorb it passively through their adaptation, are Russian people.

These two things are very well known to the Anglo-Saxon occultists, that is, they see it that way, that is their conviction. Their conviction is, on the one hand, that Anglo-Saxonism has to replace the Roman essence; everything else, Protestantism, Calvinism and so on, are only appendages. Anglo-Saxonism must produce something in the world – as I said, I am now speaking of the occultists – that stands for the fifth post-Atlantic culture in the same way as the Roman Catholic essence stood for the second period of the fourth post-Atlantic culture, even as late as the 14th, 15th and 16th centuries.

And now every occultist on this side is convinced that, above all, the bridge must be created between what Anglo-Saxons ascribe to themselves and the Russian essence. To infuse into the Russian soul that which Anglo-Saxon occultism seeks to teach is the ideal that emerges from the second point I have mentioned for every Anglo-Saxon occultist: to use the Russian soul as a kind of wax into which is imprinted that which Anglo-Saxon occultism wants. This ideal is far more prevalent in the circles I am now talking about than anything that is the main thing for us here.

For us, the main thing is real knowledge, real striving for truth, and our honest fundamental conviction is that when we find the truth, this truth will give people what they need, and that this truth, when we seek it in the right way, will also fructify in the right way the coming cultural epochs, so that what must happen to the peoples of Europe will come to pass, if the truth is honestly sought in the right way. Nothing more is needed than the honest search for truth; that is the true principle of spiritual science.

But this is opposed by a principle such as I have just characterized, which puts a particular race at the helm, a particular race in power, in power above all in relation to the life of the soul. We are not speaking politically now, we are speaking of what is rooted in the depths as occult paths: to make the Anglo-Saxon soul powerful and to use the Eastern European nature, which is adaptable and receptive, and to infuse it with what one wants to infuse into it, so that a marriage can arise between Anglo-Saxon and Russian. The inner impulses of human development speak of a marriage of the German nature with Russian nature. The selfish will of Anglo-Saxon occultism speaks of the fact that Russian nature must be permeated with Anglo-Saxon nature in terms of occult development of the soul.

You must face these things squarely; they are extraordinarily important. I am mentioning them as they are taught more and more in all possible occult directions in the West, especially in the Anglo-Saxon occult schools. But that which basically only the consciousness soul has to cultivate cannot acquire real content. Real occultism, however, which does not unfold desires for power but seeks the truth, is completely in organic, vital connection with the German development and is completely anchored within the German development.

But what has happened, my dear friends? If the development since the Middle Ages had not been disturbed by Ahrimanic forces, if what has happened in Europe for spiritual science had developed organically, without Ahrimanic influences (we will talk about some very late events again tomorrow), then it would be easier to see today that everything the West has achieved in the way of spiritual science has emerged from the Germanic essence. But permeated by Anglo-Saxon influences, German spiritual science was carried in masks into Anglo-Saxon and also into French culture. Only the terminology, the naming of the individual facts, was adapted to the French or English language. But if you get to the bottom of it, all that is contained in French and English occultism is German spiritual scientific research in a masked form, Central European spiritual scientific research.

In a way that I will discuss in a moment, what was called the Theosophical Society contained nothing but facts with Indian or other names that were found within German spiritual science. And the aim of the Theosophical Society was to conceal these facts from the Germans as much as possible. For the Anglo-Saxon world aims to obliterate the truth of the Central European development in relation to spiritual science everywhere and to replace it with itself. Here it is the most eminent lust for power that springs from occultism. And it was a simple necessity that the peeling which has now really taken place since the turn of the century should take place, that what was originally German and what unfortunately our Germans only too gladly received with open arms from Englishness should be returned, that it should be restored in its original purity. A truth has been established. It had to be established. The fact that this truth has been established will never be forgiven by the English Theosophical Society of our German aspirations, as they have been from the beginning. This can only be veiled by slander.

But very systematically, very purposefully, all those who want to develop power within the occultist aspirations are proceeding. Therefore, it is so necessary not to be asleep in the face of these efforts, but to develop some clarity. Clarity is especially necessary in the face of significant phenomena. And clarity is particularly necessary, for example, in the face of Helena Petrovna Blavatsky, who was of course the decisive personality for the Theosophical Society.

What underlies clarity in this area can be linked to two facts: The first fact is that Helena Petrovna Blavatsky was a Russian woman who had grown out of her Russian background. The second fact is that she left behind a kind of secret science in English guise, that she gradually grew completely into what Anglo-Saxon occultism strives for, but in a roundabout way that was due to the great talent of this woman. Helena Petrovna Blavatsky was, I might say, in a certain sense, a mediumistic personality, who could only develop such adaptability, including occult-spiritual qualities, out of her Russian nationality. What the Russian otherwise has as generally human qualities, Helena Petrovna Blavatsky had precisely in terms of occult qualities. And so it came about that in Western Europe she was first attracted by French occultism, then by a certain type of British occultism, which she found to be an appropriate infusion for her soul. She believed she had to give the world something that the Anglo-Saxon occultism, as it were, prefigured, revealing itself out of the Russian soul. Instead of the coming union of the Central European and Russian natures, the penetration of Russian nature — in Helena Petrovna Blavatsky as the representative of Russian nationality — with Anglo-Saxon power occultism was deliberately and consciously placed. Those who, as it were, wanted to hold the threads of life as it develops outwardly in the physical plan were not uninvolved in this. Many tragic things have happened to the poor personality of Helena Petrovna Blavatsky, which I cannot go into today. Precisely because of her profound and comprehensive mediumship, into which all kinds of things could be poured, many, many things have happened. And it was a long way from the starting point, where attempts were first made to transmit Central European material directly to Blavatsky, which then appeared in an admittedly kaleidoscopic, almost unusable form in the “Veiled Isis”. But very soon, other personalities took hold of her, under very different influences, and in place of the one who was her leader and who wanted to guide her to Central European beings, later, in the mask of the original leader, the so-called later Koot-Hoomi individuality, which, however, according to the truly knowledgeable occultists, was nothing more than a person in the pay of the Russians who consciously wanted to forge together what could emerge from the psychic ability of Blavatsky and Anglo-Saxon occultism. One is dealing with the clash, I would say, of an original individuality – some call it master, you can call it what you want – and a later impostor, a swindler, who had assumed the mask of the first and had been given the task, on the part of Eastern Europe, which I have just hinted at.

Then the time began when Blavatsky was to join forces with occult France, where she wanted to quickly achieve certain goals and therefore presented an occultist lodge in Paris with such conditions that could not be met, so that she soon had to be expelled again because, under the influence of the individuals behind her, she always combined occult intentions with political power impulses. Then followed the American episode, which again had a political background. All these things were intended to present something to Europe that would convince Europe that a kind of new world religion for Europe could emerge from the union of spiritual Russian and Anglo-Saxon occultist lust for power. That was to be presented to Europe. And what had emerged from the German essence was to be overrun.

Oh my dear friends, I well remember – and it could be unpleasant for some how clearly such things stand before my soul – how Mrs. Besant held her very first meeting in Germany in Hamburg, and how I interpellated her within a small circle at the time, how she thinks about the development of occultism in the 19th century, and how she gave the answer in Hamburg at the time: At the turn of the 18th to the 19th century, something like occult striving asserted itself in Germany, but the Germans got stuck in pure abstractions, and it turned out that the great – as she expressed it, she always expressed herself grandly – that the great wave of spiritual life had been granted to the British people. Of course she said that in English, but it was even greater in English!

For Blavatsky, the time came when it became necessary for all those who were serious about spiritual science and who could not get involved in Anglo-Saxon lust for power to do something. And that is what later in occult circles was called Blavatsky's “occult imprisonment”. There was no other way of bringing it about. And the decision to impose this occult imprisonment, as it is called, upon Blavatsky was taken by a gathering of honest occultists, or at least the majority of them, in the last third of the nineteenth century.

Occult imprisonment consists of the fact that, through certain processes, it is possible to imprison a person's aspirations in a sphere from which he cannot see out, so that his aspirations are reflected back and he cannot cause certain damage that he would otherwise cause.

The process I am about to describe, this imposition of occult imprisonment, is not flawless; but, as I said, the people could not help themselves in any other way. Blavatsky was a strong psychic personality and could have a strong effect. That is why her writings have such an overwhelming and, on the other hand, misleading power.

Then there was what can be described as certain Indian occultists, who wanted to take a little revenge in this way because of the English stranglehold, taking possession of Blavatsky's personality, and that's where the Indian influence came in. I have discussed this in more detail elsewhere, but here I will only hint at it.

So the Indian influence came, and that is how that dubious occult science came into being, which was cultivated in the Theosophical Society for a long time and which had to be cleansed of that which was to appear in Central Europe as spiritual science. For that which is to arise in Central Europe as spiritual science must, in the sense I have indicated, be thoroughly honest, that is to say, it must strive for the truth as such and be convinced that the truth, flowing through our souls and through the development of humanity, will bring about the right thing within nations and also within the existence of human beings, the social order of human beings: pure, honest seeking of truth! And this pure, honest seeking of truth is, after all, still our main task.

I wish that this would be understood more precisely within our spiritual scientific movement here, then one would also forgive me certain additional conditions, which I must set, and would see that these conditions must be taken more precisely. How often do I admonish our friends, one should, so that one can remain pure with what is to be brought to the world as spiritual science, so that it cannot be adapted from any side, do not come to me with all kinds of other things that can be so easily combined with spiritual scientific endeavors. Of course, people are quite willing to do anything that human will can demand, and in a friendly way many things can happen, but in any case it must be understood why I repeatedly and repeatedly admonish people not to believe that I am even remotely involved in pharmacology, any more than I am involved in other, non-spiritual fields. It is necessary that our members should get into the habit of taking seriously what I say, namely, that in the main they should not come to me with medical matters. It is essential that these matters should be understood, because it is still necessary, at least for the time being, to keep the spiritual-scientific endeavour, as far as I am concerned, quite separate from other matters. There are enough medical personalities within our movement to whom our members can turn for help. Since I emphasize this again and again, it should be taken seriously, at least in principle, when I say: I do not want to get involved in any kind of healing; because in doing so, the world will only misunderstand what the spiritual scientific movement should do through me in the first instance, and that should not be misunderstood.

How little there actually was in Anglo-Saxonism of a proper understanding of the pure, objective striving for truth could be known by those who had once heard a remarkable lecture by Mrs. Besant on “Theosophy and Imperialism”. From this lecture one could intuitively feel much of what I had to say today based on the facts: Spiritual science should never be mixed with any kind of lust for power, with any kind of direct political aspiration, although it goes without saying that someone who is a good spiritual scientist can be the best politician. But that is not the point. Rather, spiritual science must not become what occultism is in Anglo-Saxon culture, which I have tried to characterize; spiritual science must not become something that has been striven for precisely through Blavatsky, and then in many respects also through Mrs. Besant, only with less talent and less gift than through Helena Petrovna Blavatsky. The endeavour was, after all, on the part of Anglo-Saxondom to found a kind of occult religion by means of the spiritual experiences of a personality such as Blavatsky was. This religion would have carried Anglo-Saxondom, by way of conquest over Germanism, directly into Russism. In the schools, where not in Blavatsky's way but in the Anglo-Saxon occult way of teaching the things I have already mentioned are taught, the war in which we are now engaged has been spoken of again and again as a necessary one. And again and again in such schools the outcome of this war is spoken of very suggestively in such a way that one says: This and that must happen because of this war. - It is not said out of a sense of prophecy, but because it is desired, because the aim is to gain as much influence as possible, to prepare people through all channels that can be reached at the time. Because when people are taught all kinds of occultism in masks, the aim is to prepare people for a certain direction. That is why I must ask – I must discuss these things because they are already being discussed publicly, and because someone who represents spiritual science as I do must make it clear how he stands on these things: Why did an occult personality known to occultists in Paris travel to Rome again and again immediately after the war between Germany, Russia, England and France broke out, and as late as October 1914? Why did this person play a role in Rome that later had an influence on the situation in Italy, a role similar to that played by certain people who belonged to the 'Grand Orient de France' or were connected with Anglo-Saxon freemasons, and which had a profound influence on the course of current events, much more than one might think?

But I must ask something else: why does the yearbook, which the same personality, who is used, one could also say abused, by certain currents of occultism, for all sorts of stuff – as I said, because it is already being discussed in the world, so I have to show on which side I stand in these matters? Why does the 1913 yearbook, published by this personality and which actually appeared in 1912, state: 'He who believes he rules Austria will not rule, but another, younger one will rule, who is not yet destined to rule'? Why is this in a yearbook of a medium that is part of a certain occult current? Why is the same thing repeated in the yearbook in 1914 – that is, before the year 1914 came, for 1914, but already published in 1913: The tragedy of the Habsburg house will be fulfilled faster than one might think. Why is this in these yearbooks? And even more: Why does a Parisian paper, which could be called 'Paris Midday' in German, already express the wish in 1913 that the Austrian 'heir to the throne Franz Ferdinand must be murdered? This paper corresponds approximately to what is in Berlin 'B. Z. am Mittag': 'Paris midi' is that, widely read. Why does the almanac state on one page what I have quoted: “He who thinks he rules will not rule, but a younger one will rule,” and on the other page the wish that this archduke be murdered? Why does the same paper, when the debate on the three-year term of office in France took place, cynically write: If mobilization should take place in France, Jaures will be the first to be assassinated'? Do you think that, my dear friends, is prophecy? I would just like to show you that I am not on the side of those who think this is prophecy, but that it all points to deep, dreadful undercurrents in the abuse of charlatanry, but downright dangerous to humanity, in the occult.

Today I wanted to tell you something that may not be uplifting, but it is all the more serious. I wanted to ask your soul whether a person does not really have to acquire a very clear view if they want to be involved in an occult current, and whether it might not be a bad thing if you wanted to oversleep the most important things. My dear friends, anyone who wants to study the connection of the Theosophical Society – as it has gradually become more and more – with such things, need only keep a sharp eye on the activities of such personalities as, for example, Mrs. Catherine Tingley. And it is also instructive that when something was to be introduced into what should be solely Anglo-Saxon, from a more Christian point of view, even through a strong medium, in the little book 'Light on the Path' by Mabel Collins, the slander started. For most of what has been said against the medium through which “Light on the Path” has been given to humanity is slander.

I wanted to speak to you today with some seriousness, so that out of this seriousness many of us may get an idea of how necessary it is to become aware of the Central European mission in relation to spiritual science, and that it is absolutely necessary for this Central European mission to become a world mission. Above all, this Central European mission must be a pure and honest striving for truth. But this pure and honest striving for truth was understood in a strange way, and the distortions of the truth were also understood in a strange way. You know that the relationship between the German spiritual movement, to which we belong, and the Theosophical Society was dissolved long before the war. All that I have hinted at was understood in a strange way. Just consider that Mrs. Besant, for example, managed to say that I had aspired to become president of the Theosophical Society in India in order to oust her from the presidential chair and to use pan-German currents in England-hostile fashion in favor of the German Reich by way of a detour through India! You will really believe that this is not true, that this is an objective untruth!

The following is in contrast to this: In 1909, a society was founded against the horrors of Mr. Leadbeater, and later also against the humbug of Alcyone, which was to include all countries of the world and was to be a counterweight to those misled by Mrs. Besant. And at that time I was invited from India to become the chairman, the president of this international society, and I not only refused, but in 1909 in Budapest, in front of witnesses, I told Mrs. Besant that I never want to be anything else within the spiritual movement of modern times than the one who leads this movement within the German national organism. I said this before witnesses in Budapest in 1909 to Mrs. Besant. Now she takes it so seriously with the truth that she writes in her English magazine that I had tried to go to India and so on, in order to displace her from there! One can no longer speak of objective untruthfulness, since it is, of course, a conscious lie. But it is necessary to work with such means when the issue is that one has to fight against the course of truth itself; and that is basically what Anglo-Saxon occultism is. Because the truth is this: what is connected to the essence of Central European beings is what, as spiritual science, has to permeate human culture. But this has to be veiled, covered, masked in some way from England. And more and more in the 20th century, Mrs. Besant has also become an instrument of this veiling.

There is a sufficient need to reflect on what should flow in our movement. The spiritual-earthly task is really there. We have no reason to do so without examining and testing, to give blind allegiance to one or the other. But that is not something that can be very tempting today: to want nothing more than the honest development of the truth. You know how attacks and also ridicule and scorn are raining down from all sides within and outside our society. But in addition to all this, there is something else: More and more of our spiritual-scientific movement is flowing out into this or that soul. Those who have an eye for it already feel what flows from our books or our public lectures into the soul of people. But when these people, who are sometimes quite willing to defend what they have allowed to flow into them, should unreservedly profess what our movement is trying to do in such earnest, namely to enter into the spiritual path of humanity, then peculiar phenomena come to light. Sometimes it is really the case that people are glad to grasp many a truth that has been produced on our soil, but that they take every honest, wholehearted approach to us as if, for example, they would burn their fingers by actually touching me. It is a very common phenomenon, more common than one might think! Among those who are honestly concerned, not with some personality or other, but with my own, honest spiritual scientific striving for truth, one can assume that they will also profess it unconditionally. Because, my dear friends, the seriousness is great, the seriousness is enormous.

The things I have said should not be spoken out of some national sentiment. Basically, I have only told you facts; they should characterize what is present as occult antagonisms in Europe and which, for those who want to see, can already explain much of the antagonisms of the physical plane.

And I would like to emphasize it again and again: we need seriousness in order to find the right direction in a serious time, so that what I have already emphasized here may come true, which lies in the words:

From the courage of the fighters,
From the blood of the battles,
From the suffering of the abandoned,
From the people's sacrificial deeds
Will grow spiritual fruit —
Guiding souls, spiritually aware
Their minds into the spiritual realm.

When we last spoke to each other during my previous visit, we considered some spiritual facts that relate to the life of the human soul after the human being has passed through the gate of death. Today, we will first look at some facts related to this event in the spiritual world that may shed further light on this event, facts that, however, are just as likely to shed light on the event of death as they are to shed light on what happens in the life between the birth and death of a person, what happens in the physical life in which we are immersed. I must again and again emphasize that spiritual science must attempt not to stop at an external schematic conception of the human being, but to penetrate ever deeper and deeper into the various members of the human being.

Let us now turn our attention to what we have often called the human etheric body. In yesterday's public lecture, I already pointed out that this etheric body should not be imagined merely as a rarefied physical body — that would be a materialistic view — but that it should be imagined as it appears through an inner experience. And here we come to the fact that what we call thinking or imagining in the narrower sense, as man lives here on the physical plane, actually takes place in the etheric body. But in order for thoughts to be formed through this thinking, through this imagining, the physical body is necessary, because the physical body must receive its impressions if thoughts are to be retained here in physical life in the form of memories.

The process is as follows: when we think, the thinking naturally starts from the I, passes through the astral body, but then it takes place mainly in the movements of the etheric body. Whatever we think, whatever we imagine, takes place in the movements of the etheric body. These movements of the etheric body are literally impressed upon the physical body. This is a rough way of putting it, because it involves much more subtle processes than a rough imprinting, but it is a rough way of putting it. And because these movements of the etheric body are imprinted in the physical body, thoughts take place for our consciousness, and that is how thoughts are also retained in memory. It is more or less like this: when we have a thought and later recall it from memory, our etheric body is set in motion by the act of wanting to remember, and it adapts its movements to those of the physical body. By entering into the impressions that this etheric body made in the physical body during the corresponding thought, the thought comes to the consciousness again. Thus memory is linked to the fact that the movements of the etheric body can imprint themselves on the physical body. Of course, memory is connected to the ether body, but the ether body must have some kind of recorder of its movements so that memory can come about in physical life. And so we live our lives between birth and death, have our experiences and remember our experiences, that is, our thought life runs within us. When we are awake, we always have more or less of this thought life going on within us.

As a human being in the physical body, we have the feeling that what takes place in our thinking, in our imaginative life, is inner experience, something that takes place within ourselves, that is our property. And for our physical life this is initially correct, because what takes place inwardly as a thought experience is not visible to others. So it is our property. But in relation to the spiritual world, what takes place in our thought life is not our property at all.

Yes, our thought life has a completely different significance than we often assume when we refer to it as our property. And let us inquire a little about this world significance of our thought life. In order for me to make myself quite clearly understood, I must start from a comparison: We physical people work here in the physical world. Let us assume that our work consists of making machines. It could also consist of something else, but let us assume that it consists of making machines. To make the machines that are then used in the service of human life, we need wood or iron or whatever the machines are made of. We need the appropriate materials for this, and we have to work these materials. The materials must be there in nature. We as physical human beings cannot create iron, create wood, these materials must be there. We take these materials, shape them, work them and assemble them into our machines. In this way we humans perform a certain activity. We bring about, as it were, the existence of a realm of machines, but we create this realm of machines on the basis of the materials we take from the earth.

Now imagine that we are not dealing with people who make machines out of earthly materials, out of iron or wood, but with the beings of the next higher hierarchy, the beings to whom we give the names: Angeloi, Archangeloi, Archai. One might ask: What do these beings actually have to do? Do they also have something to do that could perhaps be compared to the activity just mentioned, which leads to the creation of a realm of machines? Yes, these angeloi, archangeloi and archai also have their activity. This activity takes place only in the spiritual world. And just as we humans must take our iron and our wood from the subordinate realms, that is, first from the mineral and then from the vegetable kingdom, in order to construct our machines, so the angels, archangels and archai also need materials to build, let us say, what they are to build, although the expression is of course very crude. And what are their materials? For much of what the angels, archangels and archai have to accomplish in the spiritual world, the materials are precisely the thoughts that people consider their own. And it is true: while we go through the world and harbor our thoughts, look at our thought life from within, as it were, and consider it our own, work on our thoughts without knowing it, the angels, archangels and archai are at work. We are aware of only the very least that lives in our thoughts, for thoughts signify much more than what comes to our consciousness, much more than what lives in our souls. While we think and remember our thoughts, the beings of the higher hierarchy, the next hierarchy, work from the outside in, so to speak, in accordance with the way they can use our thoughts. So you should imagine that only one side of the thought life of every human being takes place in their consciousness. While they are thinking, the beings of the hierarchies mentioned are constantly surrounding them and working with the help of their thoughts. These are their materials. And what they work with in this way is part of what is needed so that Jupiter, Venus and Vulcan can one day emerge from the earth. This is part of what brings about progress in the evolution of the universe. And our whole life until death is spent working on thoughts, insofar as they are, as it were, embraced by our being, from the outside in by the beings of the higher hierarchy.

And when we pass through the gate of death, then, as we have already indicated in my previous presence, some time after we have passed through the gate of death, our etheric body is taken from us and woven into the general world ether. Not only what we see last, when we look at one side of our web of thoughts, is woven into the universal ether, but also what the beings mentioned have worked for. While they are, as it were, working on our individual thought-weave during our lifetime, they then piece together the individual thought-weaves of one person, then another, then a third, in whatever way they can use them, so that something new may come into being in the progressive development of the world. What they can acquire by putting together the individual etheric bodies of the people they have worked with during the time of their physical life must be woven into the general world ether.

From this you can see how serious our inner life actually is. It is quite serious. Depending on how we think, we are found useful for the general process of world development. Someone who has spent their whole life thinking only foolish things, or only endeavoring to think things that are images of the physical world, will not provide very good building materials for what is to be woven out of his ether body into the general world ether. The inner life, the inner life of thought, is a serious matter. It seems to be our own during the time between birth and death. In the way it has been described, it actually belongs to the whole world. And just as we humans could not make machines without wood and iron, so the higher beings could not continue to work on the evolution of the world if they could not find their building materials in the thoughts we can give them during our physical lives. We are the soil from which they take their wood, their iron and so on, that is, our thought fabric. They carry out their exalted work with these materials, guided by their wisdom, which transcends human existence; but the materials must provide them with what lies within us.

What we are able to give to these beings, the angels, archangels, archai, is there for us to contemplate during the time between our death and a new birth. We know, of course, that we will be taken just a few days after we have passed through the gate of death. But as we continue to live between death and a new birth, our soul's gaze is constantly fixed on what we were able to give to the general web of the ether of the world. And just as we ourselves now have to participate in the creation of that which then connects with physical matter to give us a new incarnation, so the sight of what we have thus given to the great world has an effect on our work. In short, whether we have something to look forward to, from which we can draw new impulses for a next incarnation in this thought fabric interwoven with the world ether, or whether we cannot, much will depend on this with regard to the way we will be able to prepare for our new incarnation.

So our thoughts are bound to our physicality before we pass through the gate of death. Then they are taken from us in a sense and woven into the general world ether in what the beings mentioned have made of them, so that they now have an existence outside of us rather than within us. Therefore, in spiritual science, this process can be described as “the inner becomes an outer” in order to always remember it, to always have it in mind, so to speak, for meditation. For just as we see mountains, rivers, clouds and stars with our physical eyes here, so after death we see what our thoughts have woven as the outside, which is taken from us and woven into the general world ether. It is now the outside world, uplifting or saddening us, strengthening or weakening us. The inner world has become an outer world.

Then we know that there is a more distant, very long time in which we have to relive, in a certain way, what we have gone through in our earthly life, but differently than we went through it in earthly life. We relive, as we know, with threefold speed the past life between death and birth in reverse order, so what we have experienced in the last year, first, then that of the year before last and so on. So we live the life after death in imaginations, but differently than we have lived it here in the physical body. After our ether body has been separated from us, we live life again, but in such a way that we do not now experience what we have experienced in our feelings, in our will impulses during our physical existence. If we take the extreme case of having hurt or offended someone during our physical existence, we have felt something by offending them. But they have also felt something. What we felt is what drove us out of our feelings to insult him, and then also what we felt, perhaps even a certain satisfaction with the act. In short, you can imagine what a person feels, in the good or bad sense, when he does something on the physical plane. But the other person, the one at whom we were aimed, feels something different. The one who is offended feels something different than the one who offends. After death, in this regression, which is to be characterized now, we feel the effects that we have caused in other people, but also in other beings, with our actions, with our will impulses, and even with our thoughts. So we do not feel what we already felt while we were in the physical body, but what we have done in other souls, in other beings. What was external, what remained external during our physical life, now becomes internal. Just as the separation of the etheric body turns the inner into the outer, so this reliving turns the outer into the inner. Our soul is filled with the effects of our physical existence. This now becomes our inner life: the external becomes an internal. Thus the internal becomes an external and the external becomes an internal. In this way the human being is, as it were, turned around after passing through the gate of death.

Imagine how you previously had to imagine the angeloi, archangeloi and archai in a certain relationship to the human world of thought, and now imagine the spirits of the higher hierarchies: the spirits of form, the spirits of movement, the spirits of wisdom, even the Spirits of Will, the Thrones, which you should imagine as being in a kind of relationship to what I have now characterized, how the human being acquires a new inner being that is now welded together from the outer being. With their spiritual eye, if I may use the image, the Form Spirits, the Spirits of Movement, the Spirits of Wisdom, the Spirits of Will, look down on that remarkable, meaningful spectacle that takes place after the human being, between birth and death, has , through his impulses of will, inwardly experiences this or that between birth and death; what he now experiences after he has passed through the gate of death, where he gathers up the effects, as it were, in order to make them into a new inner being, that inner being which can then live itself further out in karma during the building of the later incarnation. From their spiritual heights, the aforementioned spirits observe how everything that spreads out into the world as our effects becomes inner. And what they observe in this way is now material for them to incorporate something else into the lower spirits of the ongoing world development, in order to provide help above all so that karma can be effected, so that what is pushed from the outside inwards provides the foundation for a slow process that unites between 'death and a new birth that tissue that then descends to the physical hereditary substance in order to connect as a spiritual being with what the person inherits from father and mother. Much is necessary for that to come about, which descends from the spiritual heights and must connect with the hereditary substance that comes from the ancestors. After the human being has passed through the gate of death, discarded his etheric body, and undergone the return journey through the world of the soul, as mentioned earlier, the work that must be done between death and a new birth begins, so that the new birth, the new incarnation, can come about.

What kind of work is done? It is actually infinitely difficult to characterize the way we are worked on in the spiritual cosmos. If I were to characterize it, I could perhaps do so in the following way through a schematic sketch. Let us assume that a person passes through the gate of death. His ether body is then discarded. That which he himself still has control over remains in the vicinity of the earth for a relatively long time. I have characterized such things to you over time. But that which the angels, archangels, and archai have woven extends so far out into the general ether world that it unfolds in a wide sphere whose center is the earth. Thus, like a spiritual atmosphere, the world ether surrounds the earth. And what we have spun out of our thoughts is woven into this world ether. Do not be anxious about where there could be space for all these weavings: the spiritual permeates itself, and all these weavings are within this sphere.

In its further course, man now sees this fabric not from within but from without. And his further life is a kind of enlargement, a merging into the universe. And during the whole time that life takes place between death and a new birth, the human being always sees from the outside in, sees: That is you - like an even more powerful, more expansive sphere. On this sphere, you imagine something like a mighty map. It is, of course, all figurative and roughly expressed, but it does reflect the facts. There, on this map, on this globe, work is being done by drawing everything in, by incorporating it spiritually: First, what has been worked out by the person himself in his etheric body, which the person can look at, but then also what has now become human inside in the way I have described. All this is incorporated by the spirits of form, spirits of movement, spirits of wisdom and willpower working on the person between death and new birth. And when the time has come for the new incarnation to take place, this web is ready. Then there is a mighty sphere. Again, there is no need to worry that there would be no space for all these spheres; they can all be inside one another. It is, of course, a picture for a spiritual thing. Then this sphere begins to become smaller and smaller, and it turns, just as you turn a glove inside out, so that the inside becomes the outside and the outside becomes the inside. That which is, as it were, on the outside, all goes inside, turns completely and becomes so small that it can unite with the human germ as it develops in the mother's body. That is also a picture.

Of course, these things can also be presented in a different way. This has already been done here. But today we want to imagine the matter in such a way that, in proportion to what a person has given to the beings of the higher hierarchies during his life between birth and death, these spirits of the higher hierarchies work both on the world and on the establishment of the spiritual foundations for the new incarnation of the human being. I think that is a tremendous thought when it settles in our soul in an emotional way, when we become aware of what our life actually means for the entire universe when we are in it. And it is necessary that, from this moment on, more and more people imbibe this awareness of being connected to the spiritual world throughout their lives.

The very clever people of today, who are opponents of spiritual science, will say: Human life goes on even if one does not spread such knowledge among people, but knowledge of a much simpler kind. For these would only be things that are there for thinking, with which one could weigh down one's thinking; but one does not need to burden life with such thoughts. — That is what the very clever people say. And they might even add: People in the past did not have such unnecessary wisdom and were able to make progress. The people who say this have no idea how stupid what they say is, because such an assertion is made on the assumption that it is really true that people were always as ignorant of the spiritual secrets of existence as they are now. But it is not so long ago that people were not so ignorant. This can be shown even by outward appearances everywhere.

I will give you one such outward appearance. I have never had the opportunity to visit a picture gallery here to see if there are similar pieces here in Stuttgart. But recently we visited a picture gallery in Hamburg, and the following emerged. You see, when today's painters are supposed to paint what we know as a great, powerful picture, but a picture of a truth, such as we know, the Fall of Man at the beginning of the Old Testament, when painters are supposed to paint this Fall of Man based on what they consider to be right today, well, they paint a tree, with Eve on one side and Adam on the other. Depending on whether they are expressionists, impressionists or some other “ists,” they paint these human figures more or less vividly, I mean, on the tree, they paint a snake. That's naturalistic, isn't it, that's realistic. But if you look more closely, for those who can really think, it's not realistic at all. Because I would like to know the woman, even if she were an Eve, who would let herself be tempted by such an ordinary snake with a real naked snake's head to do what Eve let herself be tempted to do. I mean, that's not possible. An Eve will not let herself be tempted by such a snake. We know, of course, that it is a matter of seduction by Lucifer. But can Lucifer be represented by an ordinary snake? At most, this can only be the image. But we know of Lucifer that he actually received his existence by remaining behind on the lunar level. There were no such snakes there as have formed during the time on earth. So it is quite unnatural to paint a pure snake with a huge snake's head. How should Lucifer actually be painted if one wanted to paint him realistically in the sense of our spiritual science? One would have to paint him in such a way that one expresses how Lucifer was for one who still expresses the imaginative during the moon period, as I have described in the Akasha Chronicle. That is to say, if one goes into it in more detail, one will find that what has now become physical in man as the head on Earth, with the thick, sometimes very thick, bony skull, was still thin in those days. It could be seen imaginatively. But what is attached to it – you can see it in the skeleton, how the human being actually consists of the two parts, the brain and the spine – that is attached to it only like a very thin strip. The rest is actually earthly work. And what is actually the skull of the human being has come from the moon, and the spinal cord has come across as an appendage. Everything else was added through what we have developed as earthly existence. So what would Lucifer have to look like for an imaginative insight? He would have had a human skull, and attached to it something like a snake's body, developed as a movable part at that time, the backbone. That is how he would have looked. If you wanted to paint realistically, you would have to paint the tree, and on the tree the human head with the snake body hanging from it, hinting at the backbone. Then you would paint truthfully. But then you would have to know something about the mystery of existence, about the spiritual worlds with which man is connected.

In the Hamburg Museum of Pictures, you will find a painting from the 13th or 14th century by the so-called Master Bertram. The Fall of Man is painted exactly as I have described it to you. It is not a mere snake that is depicted, but everything about the tree is painted as I have just described it to you. What does that mean? It means that at most it has only been a few centuries since people no longer know how they are connected to the spiritual world and that there is a spiritual world in the sense described. So people have become so foolish that they believe that the way people now look at the world with their mere physical senses and with the mere mind that is bound to the brain is the way they have always looked at it; they would only have been a little more childish and would have come up with all sorts of myths. This is how university science thinks today. But it is all nonsense, because it is only a few centuries since mankind lost its living connection with the spiritual world. And in the face of the great tasks of knowledge, materialistic science of the present day is nothing but a walking stupor in relation to the spiritual world. And this stupor is what walks around as the authoritative among men today, what is marveled at as great progress. It had to come sometime. We know why it had to come: so that people are protected by their mere physical development and can become free. And that must be seen through. And even from such external documents as I have quoted to you, people could see, if they had just a little, forgive me, sense in their heads, how short a time it is since spiritual insight has been lost to man. But it does not occur to people today to really look at these things in thought. They prefer to choose external means of power because it is convenient, because they do not need to learn anything special, but only need to stand at some laboratory table and let certain methods be drummed into them; and then they declare by external fiat that everything that speaks of the spiritual world is error and nonsense and fantasy. This is what is to be given to people at the present time instead of a real inclination towards the spiritual world.

But, my dear friends, at present it is still the case that everything that involves inventiveness remains as a legacy from those ancient times when people looked into the spiritual world. If that were to disappear, then people would no longer make any inventions. And if spiritual science did not rekindle human thinking, it would not last fifty years. Within that time everything that works in mere materialism, a way of talking about external matter, and no one would come up with anything that could enrich art or ideology or somehow enrich the outer life. Therefore it is the strictest demand of the time, not a mere preference for any spiritual reverie, that a consciousness of the connection of humanity with the spiritual world should take hold, that people should be able to look up again. And they can do so, now that the old atavistic clairvoyance has passed away, by going through spiritual science.

And in this sense it is indeed necessary that people learn how a study of spiritual science can not only enrich their knowledge of the spiritual world, but also lead to correct thinking about life as a whole. Time and again, one experiences how people in the present time are actually quite reluctant to engage in that somewhat complicated inner life of the soul, which must be developed if one is to approach the spiritual world. Just imagine: a real average professor of today – of course there may be exceptions, no one is to be offended, and all the more must it be praised if one should be there in this circle – a real average professor of today, he will not want to listen to these things at all, it is much too boring for him. If you talk about spiritual things today, you have to use general, vague phrases that mean as little as possible, but that also mean as little as possible for real life.

When I recently gave the same lecture in Leipzig that I gave here the day before yesterday about a faded tone in German intellectual life, two gentlemen approached me after the lecture, two gentlemen of the clever type of the people mentioned, of course, and one said that he was actually surprised that I had spoken in this way, because he would have expected that when talking from a theosophical point of view, one would be more in line with his way of thinking; he is a pacifist and, as a pacifist, must view the current war in particular.

Pacifism is the view that has been cultivated for some time under the auspices of various people, including Bertha von Suttner, but also that being in St. Petersburg that is considered Caesar and Pope at the same time. Many years ago, in lectures in Berlin, I already said that it is characteristic of the peace efforts that, since we have them, the largest and bloodiest wars in world history have been waged. But this movement is precisely one of those that thrive on spreading vague phrases that insinuate themselves into the human emotional life because all they have to do is spread love and kindness. I took the liberty of saying to the gentleman: You see, we are now living in the most terrible war the world has ever seen. We have seen more ammunition used in one day, in June or July 1915, than in the entire Franco-Prussian War! We have already reached the point that as much ammunition has been fired in this war as in all the wars that have been fought with this ammunition in the world, in the development of humanity, to date. I said: Is it not clear then that what has now taken place over centuries as culture has led itself ad absurdum, that it has shown what it leads to? - Now he objected: I see this war as an illness, and that must be cured; after all, it is only an illness, it can occur.

A sentence like this is especially illuminating because it is so self-evident and because it is quite naturally correct from any point of view. But what matters is not whether things are right, but whether they are more or less superficial. The sentence is right, of course: it is a disease. But I said to him: If you would look at the disease more deeply, why does it occur in people? Because something is not right beforehand! The disease is only the reaction against something that was not right before. So if you would just think a little further from your point of view, you would come to the conclusion that this is a disease, but it occurred because things were not right before. Because something was wrong, the illness occurred, that is true. But people mix up all kinds of correct things because they are trivial and self-evident and because they cannot actually get at deeper things. That is the serious thing to realize in the present time.

If you take a fact such as the one I mentioned the day before yesterday about Karl Christian Planck, whose intellectual capacity is clearly shown by the fact that in 1880 he foresaw exactly what is happening today, you will realize from the way he has been esteemed and recognized that this culture, which has developed there, is quite suited to make the rule of the power of the incapable, which suppresses all truthful striving, precisely to world power. One should not indulge in any ambiguity about that. That is what one must understand in the deepest sense.

I will tell you a little story. A man once heard that Goethe had written a “Faust,” and he said he wanted to get to know what this Goethean “Faust” actually contains. So the man he asked found that he had to find the most convenient, easiest method for the other man to learn what this “Faust” actually contains, and he thought deeply: How can I actually teach this person, who has no sense of the simplest idea of Goethe's “Faust,” what it contains? Then a light dawned on him. He realized: a new edition of “Faust” is being printed in a certain printing press right now, so I'll take the guy who wants to know what's in “Faust” there. And so he told him: Just watch, in three weeks' time 'Faust' will be printed here. In all the hundreds of type cases there are the most diverse letters, and now just pay attention, you will see how the typesetter takes out this and that letter and puts the individual letters together to form words. You will see exactly how page after page is put together, and how finally the “Faust” comes together from the individual letters. So the other one sat there for weeks and saw how the whole “Faust” came together through the hands of people through the letters!

Yes, you see, I can also tell it in a slightly different way. The more recent times came up. People wanted to know what actually exists in the spiritual and soul life, and they had a need to understand how perceptions, thoughts, volitional impulses and feelings are woven into the human soul and what they mean for the world as a whole. They asked — the people. Now, the newer science, this merely naturalistic science, came along and said: Well, we will do that! We will see to it that we examine the individual brain pathways, nerve fibres, ganglia and all that, as far as it can be done now, and see how they are interwoven. And there we have the soul life. You get exactly the same from Goethe's 'Faust' when you get to know it in this way as the person who sat at the printing press for three weeks does! Take all the products that are being manufactured today by the so-called psychophysiologists. In terms of spiritual knowledge of the world, you have the same knowledge as you would have of the entire “Faust” if you had watched how “Faust” is manufactured from the typesetter. It is only necessary to realize this, and then the soul will be overwhelmed by the harrowing feeling that is necessary to advance in the process of human development.

You are formidable opponents, the people of naturalism will now say, denigrating our science, the true science, which proceeds strictly according to nature! But it does not occur to us to denigrate it. We are only placing it in the right context, in the right context of life. If Faust is to come into being, then of course the research work must be done for the Faust edition; but it must be recognized in its proper cosmic position.

All that I can hint at here, in the sense in which I meant it yesterday, belongs to the serious and momentous tasks that await Central Europe in the future. All this points to these serious tasks. And to remember these things in our present serious time is an urgent necessity. For it is absolutely necessary that a deeper sense of real truth should permeate the world than can prevail under the influence of the materialistic or naturalistic or strictly scientific world view. One does not need to be opposed to people learning to typeset so that Faust editions can be made. One need not be opposed to people studying the brain and nervous system. All this should be studied, which is really very important to study today. But one must be decidedly opposed to the arrogant arrogance that exists today in materialistic science, that the sense of how seriously and worthily the spiritualization of culture must be achieved, especially from Central Europe, because Western Europe has died out in relation to these things. I am not saying this just to say something paradoxical, something strong, but because of the necessity that works for the expression of such things in our time. There will come a time when one will have to look truthfully at various things; but today there is not much sense for such truthful looking. I could give you thousands and thousands of examples of the inner dishonesty of the current scientific and literary establishment. Let me give you at least one that I would have liked to have mentioned in yesterday's public lecture, but time is always too short, and unfortunately the lectures have to be kept so very short.

For example, in many of Ernst Faeckel's books – you know that I have a high regard for Ernst Haeckel in the areas where he is worthy of respect – you can repeatedly find references to Karl Ernst von Baer, the excellent naturalist whom he calls his teacher. Today, people naturally pick up Haeckel's books, study them, and regard them as a kind of new Bible or at least as a kind of writing by new church fathers. For the difference is not that today people believe in their own judgment, whereas in the time of the church fathers they simply relied on the church fathers; rather, the difference is quite a different one. In the days of Tertullian and Gregory of Nazianzus, these were the Church Fathers, and people swore by them. Today, those who found monistic societies or associations for a eugenic worldview or similar fine things swear by the holy Darwin, the holy Haeckel or the holy Helmholtz. It is the same thing, only in a slightly different area! It is not called sacred, but that does not make any difference. So people read Haeckel and when he cites Karl Ernst von Baer, they have the opinion: Well, you can see that this great naturalist Karl Ernst von Baer was in complete agreement with Haeckel in his rejection of any spiritual world. I would like to advise many a person today, after he has had a little sniff of Haeckel's and Darwin's books, to do many other things before he sets about founding a branch for a monist association: for example, if Haeckel cites Ernst von Baer, to take Karl Ernst von Baer in hand himself and read him. I will read just one passage from Karl Ernst von Baer, where he discusses the relationship between the spiritual and material worlds. Baer says: “The earth is only the seedbed on which the spiritual inheritance of man proliferates, and the history of nature is only the history of the progressive victories of the spiritual over matter. That is the fundamental idea of Creation, to please it, no, to achieve it, it makes individuals and generations disappear and elevates the present on the scaffolding of an immeasurable past.

So what does this bear say? The terrestrial body, the earth is the seedbed, and into it are sunk the spiritual germs, so that they envelop themselves. — This bear spoke the pure truth at the beginning of the 19th century! Ernst Haeckel picks out the sentences from Baer that suit him. Those who do nothing but at most found monistic associations to promote world wisdom know nothing of all this other than what Haeckel says about Baer, and continue to live in the lie without even the slightest inclination to convince themselves of the underlying fact. Our literature today is permeated with such webs of lies everywhere. And everywhere, especially in our popular scientific literature, the striving for the greatest possible vagueness and playfulness, one could even say, of intellectual endeavors and the greatest possible reluctance to express oneself, comes to expression in these things, to look into them and judge them with clear, confident human judgment.

To give you some specific examples, in the West there are various high-ranking Masonic orders among the French, the British and the Italians, some with thirty-three degrees, but there are also some with over ninety degrees. In the course of the last few centuries, much has been fished out in the murky depths of such orders. And if we examine with sober, healthy judgment the influence of all kinds of unhealthy, foolish, but well-thought-out personal and political intentions, if we study the influences and currents of Freemasonry that exist in Western Europe on the part Italy played in this war, then we will get an inkling of the many ambiguities and obfuscation in our so-called culture! What has taken place, especially in such Masonic orders since the outbreak of the war, will one day become a curious chapter. The German Freemasons will come off relatively best in this, because of them one thing can be said: that they were the fool in the whole game. They did not notice anything, that is, insofar as they lived in brotherhood with the others. And that is something that can still be said in their favor. But one should not believe that what is asserted from such sides is without influence on what lives and works around us in so-called culture, and what can only work and live as long as other people do not want their judgment clarified and strengthened by insight into the spiritual world.

In my book Thoughts During the Time of War, I have drawn attention, as far as one can in public literature in order to be understood – and indeed it has been little understood – to certain currents that are everywhere in the East and in the West. These currents, let us say for example the Eastern Slavophile current, to which I have referred in the aforementioned booklet, are rooted much deeper. At the end of the eighteenth century, and especially at the end of the nineteenth century, but also decades earlier, the western Masonic orders in particular had a greater influence on Russian intellectual life, transplanting, infecting, and instilling what was to emerge there. And in many respects Slavophilism and Pan-Slavism are truly the seeds that sprouted from what many had planted from these very Masonic orders. Under the mask, under the cloak of ceremony, people were initially befuddled, so to speak, and all kinds of nonsense was paraded before them so that they might then be inclined to favor certain plans. And what things have taken place in Eastern Europe from this Western side, mankind will then, when other events have taken the place of the warlike ones, be able to see for itself!

If these places where we are together in our branches are the only places where one can speak today, then it must at least be discussed here.

Today I wanted to take up the great, the sublime in the connection of the human being with entire hierarchies, which can arise in our soul when we consider that what we carry within us in our thoughts and feelings is already within our physical shell between birth and death, but then also between death and a new birth in a web, a world work on which entire hierarchies work in the context of the world. What matters is not that we know the individual so much, but that we can imbue ourselves with such a world feeling, and that you, my dear friends, leave such a contemplation with a feeling for what the human being actually is within the world, and what he should know about this connection with the world. That all this flows together in your souls, in your hearts, into a sense of the world, and that in this way something of the power that can be kindled in you can be kindled by what is to be incorporated into our culture, insofar as each of us is able to do so in the place we are placed in the world. Official scholars have not worked on these things today; they will not do so. Therefore, people's eyes must also be opened to the position that official scholars deserve in the world: that they, insofar as they do laboratory work, can be compared to typesetters, or some, who do not do laboratory work, merely to people who describe the typesetting. Today, these are mostly the philosophers who preach at the universities.

That this is so should be known in individual souls. For this is not a criticism of the times, it is a characterization. Only by knowing how things stand in the different ages have the forces been found to further development, only by this.

I wanted to impress this on you, especially in these difficult times, when it is not always possible to say that we will see each other again: a realization that, when we feel it in the right way, can become a sacred inner duty of the human soul towards the world connection. Deaths and more deaths surround us today in the event, which on the one hand is the fruit of the preceding development in the sense indicated, but which must be a signpost for many things that have to happen so that humanity does not advance in the way the designers of the set box want, but advances in a way that corresponds to the necessity of world development.

Of course, yesterday I quoted everything materialism, everything by Lamettrie, that he said – of course, that is also true – Erasmus would only have needed a small cog in his nervous system to change, then perhaps he would not have become Erasmus but a fool. I said that there is no need to refute that. But we, who are perhaps a little prepared, must indeed know a little more about it.

We take everything we have considered today, let it become feeling and sensation in us, and then we say to ourselves how true it is that the numerous sacrificial deaths that are currently being made really do relate to earthly existence in such a way that the etheric bodies, which are taken from people at an early age, remain connected to earthly existence for a long, long time remain connected with earthly existence, and that now there must be people who can become aware of what lives in these unconsumed etheric bodies, which still contain everything that these people could still have used in their earthly life if they had lived for decades, that is in the spiritual-etheric of the earth. But there must be people in the time to come who are conscious of this, so that the fruits of what these ethereal bodies contain may fall to the culture of the earth and not to Ahriman. Let us then, in view of the fact that we have to prepare ourselves in our souls for what is happening, imbue ourselves with the words that have often been spoken here:

From the courage of the fighters,
From the blood of the battles,
From the suffering of the abandoned,
From the people's sacrificial deeds
The fruit of the spirit will grow —
Guiding souls, spirit-conscious
Their minds into the spiritual realm.

In my presence today, I intend to speak to you about things that can help the seeking human mind to understand the events of the present a little more deeply. These things should not be discussed in an external way, but rather, some should be pointed out that can help man, so to speak, in a spiritual expansion of understanding of our present time. This intention, which I have had for a long time for this visit to Stuttgart, we also want to carry out. We still have the lecture next Sunday.

In view of the many things that, I would say, like waves of our time — I say this with full deliberation — play into our movement from the outside, it seems necessary to me, however, to begin today with a kind of introduction to present some principles that may be suitable to dispel some misunderstandings which can arise all too easily in our time, which hates the depth of thought and feeling, about anthroposophy, which on the other hand can be suitable for gaining a correct relationship within ourselves to what anthroposophy can be for us.

Let us try to pose the question as follows: What are we seeking when we choose the path into the anthroposophical movement? — In this way, we seek to gain the opportunity to find a relationship to the spiritual world that corresponds to the needs for this spiritual world that arise in us from the forces and living conditions of the present. No one comes to us who cannot gain access to the spiritual world by more direct routes than those we have at our disposal. No one comes to us who cannot gain access to the spiritual world by the routes that have been fully recognized for centuries and that are only as direct as people have forgotten to reflect on the justification for what has become part of the general necessities of life. On the other hand, there is much discussion about the justification for something that must, as it were, first appear in the world. We cannot often enough bear in mind what, out of the spirit of our time, anthroposophy should be and wants to be, and bring it into connection with what is in us that can push towards anthroposophy, that wants to bring us to anthroposophy.

You see, my dear friends, Anthroposophy would not be there if it were only for the one or other person who finds it appealing to agitate for such ideas, as they live in Anthroposophy, now, we use the unofficial expression. Anthroposophy arises entirely from the realization that there are searching souls in our time who can only find what they are seeking through the path of Anthroposophy. Anthroposophy is not pursued because someone wants it, but because souls long for it. The fact that some may deny this does not count against it, for much that is subconscious and unconscious lives in the soul and, when interpreted correctly, represents nothing other than the longing for Anthroposophy. Above all, if we single out one thing from this anthroposophy, it is the longing to recognize the greatest impulse of earthly development, the Christ impulse, in a way that is appropriate to the needs of the present, to find the path to the Christ impulse in the way that the heart must long for if it really wants to understand itself within the living conditions of the present. Now such general, abstract sentences, as I have just uttered, are certainly plausible to someone who has been grounded in anthroposophy for years. But what it is about is this: to really permeate one's soul with the spirit of these words in such a way that they do not remain merely abstract, merely theoretical in us, but that they become the content of our whole life, above all the content of our way of thinking.

I have already given an example here that is particularly characteristic: I once gave a lecture in a town in southern Germany on the subject of 'Bible and Wisdom', in which I tried to explain how a positive Christian, especially if he understands himself correctly, can find his way to anthroposophy. I described how anthroposophy, through its presuppositions, can penetrate more deeply into the great and inexhaustible secrets of the original book of humanity, the Bible. After the lecture, two Catholic priests who had attended the lecture approached me. And from what they said, it was clear that they could not really object to anything in particular from their Christian doctrine, as they understood it, as they knew it as theologians - perhaps not so much as priests bound by any obligations as theologians. So they went off on a side track and said: Yes, you see, there is nothing special to be said from our point of view against what you have just said today, except this: When we speak, we speak in such a way that everyone can understand what we are saying. They also speak of Christianity, but only for those who have reached a certain level of education or have specially prepared themselves for this kind of thing. “I replied: Yes, you see, Reverend, what you or I think about the question of what should be said to all people is not the point, because that leads the whole topic down the path of personal opinion. It is not particularly remarkable that everyone believes that what they do is universally valid for all people. Why should one be surprised at that; otherwise they would not do it! But what you or I think is right is not the point. Our way of doing research on the spirit begins with rising above personal opinion and facing reality, true reality. In our case, this reality is very close. It lies simply in the answer to the question: Do all the people for whom you believe you speak – you do believe you speak for all people, don't you? – still come to church with you? The question answers a fact – the question of whether you think you speak for all people. That it should apply to all people is only your opinion; the other corresponds only to a fact. Tell me whether all people go to church! — They could not answer me except that a number of people do not go to church. That

185 refutes you, I said, because then you are not speaking for those who do not go to church. And among them are numerous people to whom I have to speak, and who also have the right to find the way to Christ in the present.

This means not judging according to what one personally considers to be true or false, but subordinating one's judgment to the demands and tasks of reality. It is, however, much more comfortable to theorize about what is right or wrong than to study reality in detail, constantly listening attentively to what reality demands of us. Anthroposophy does not want to be something other than an answer to questions that it does not ask itself, but that the hearts and souls ask in the present, when they understand each other properly. And I am aware that the questions that are asked in my writings, which are already very numerous, are not asked by me. The answers are given by me in many cases, but the questions are not asked by me. The questions are posed by what the culture of the time brings forth, by what, for example, natural science in the culture of the time brings forth, by what anyone who is interested in the demands of the time must ask, and who, above all, is serious about the most important needs of the souls of the present.

If we call these conditions to mind, then it becomes clear that a basic intention, a basic view, a basic tendency and a basic attitude prevail throughout the anthroposophical literature. If one goes through all these writings, not with the benevolent attitude that we may have gained within our circle, but with the critical eye that one can gain from the present-day culture, then one will find one thing as the core of all this anthroposophical literature. That is, that everything aims to bring the human soul that which this human soul must long for above all in the present: independence, the power of judgment from one's own inner being. I have often had to resist the urge to write popularly from this or that side. I have always resisted this urge for the simple reason that the point of anthroposophical literature is not to give people articles of faith that they can accept at will in a lightly veiled form, but rather to call on them to use their own powers of judgment and search their own souls. Anyone who wants to can see that this is the case throughout all of this anthroposophical literature.

Nowhere is the aim to evoke blind faith. Of course, there are things told that cannot be verified without further ado, but they are told as facts of the spiritual world that anyone can accept as messages and to which they can apply their critical standard, to ever greater and greater extent, if they wish. And we have seen that in recent times friends who have sympathetically examined the matter have managed to approach even the most subtle things to a high degree with the probe of an unprejudiced criticism. What is contained in the anthroposophical literature referred to here need never shrink from this unprejudiced criticism. This unprejudiced criticism will pass it; it will pass it all the better, the more unprejudiced this criticism is: Never will anyone hear anything different from me when it comes to this question than this: Test, test, test, but do not stop at testing, but seek to test by trying to get deeper and deeper into things with the means of present thinking. Because this is the aim, the writings of this literature can make people independent.

Now, however, one experiences many things when one surveys the way in which anthroposophy is received. I met people again and again who listened to one or the other lecture, read one or the other small writing, and then no longer showed themselves. That is their right, of course, and no one should be reproached for it. And when they were asked by an acquaintance why they no longer appeared - in all friendship, of course, not as if they were being reproached - they replied: “Yes, if we go into the matter in more detail, we fear being convinced.” This is certainly a significant word, but it also points to significant facts. What is being attempted is precisely this: to break away from the hereditary evil of our time, from the positing of personal opinions, from the positing of personal thecri, and to direct souls to that which the spirituality of the world itself says, if we find the possibility to surrender ourselves to this spirituality of the world with all our soul and to speak of the methods, to speak of the means by which the soul can attain to listening to the spirituality of the world itself.

A world view that emerges in this way from the deepest needs of the time, but which so thoroughly contradicts what people of the present believe, will only slowly and gradually find its way into the souls of men. Human souls cling to what is familiar; human souls prefer to hear their own water-clear thinking from the pulpit and to be able to say of what they hear: “I have thought that for a long time.” The anthroposophical teachings that are emerging in the present are certainly not truths that have been “thought for a long time”. But in the eyes of many people this is precisely the main mistake, that they cannot say to themselves: “I have thought that for a long time” — and that they do not want to say to themselves: “If I dig deep enough within myself, I will not express a personal opinion, but something that is connected with the developmental factors of humanity.” — We will come back to such developmental factors of humanity many times during my stay in Stuttgart this time. So it is understandable that many obstacles and hindrances arise when people try to approach anthroposophy, to approach spiritual science.

My book “How to Know Higher Worlds” is widely read over time, not only within those who belong to the various circles of the Anthroposophical Society, but it is also widely read outside the Society at the present time. When reading this book in particular, an experience can be made again and again that is extraordinarily characteristic. Someone reads the book “How to Know Higher Worlds” and writes me a letter about it. And of course, I am always pleased when someone writes me an intelligent letter about any book or about anything else, but especially about the book “How to Know Higher Worlds”. But the usual thing is that the letter that is written is the clearest proof, the clearest proof that the person concerned has not understood the book at all and has translated the most important things of the book into the most materialistic attitude of the present. Because what people usually go for when they come across this book is the following. But let us send something in advance: a whole host of doubts can arise in the mind of someone reading the book “How to Know Higher Worlds”, and there are already many people who can testify that I am always ready to discuss these doubts with people, and so I certainly do not want what I am saying now to appear as if it should deter anyone from writing the letter I just mentioned. No one should be deterred from writing this letter, but the letter is very often written with people getting stuck on one particular thing, where the thing immediately turns into materialism for them. Much is said in the book 'How to Know Higher Worlds', which, when properly observed, leads people to find their own way into the spiritual world, from within themselves, from their soul. This book is designed to make people as independent as possible, not to impose anything on them in any subjective way, but only to remove the obstacles so that they can find the truth themselves. The best way to begin to take in this book would be to appropriate its content in inner deed. But then people get stuck on the sentence: The one who has attained the necessary maturity will find his spiritual teacher if only he searches for him correctly. — So, there we have it! I write a letter to the one who wrote the book, and he becomes my spiritual teacher; that's the simplest thing! There we have the materialistic explanation. The fact that this passage could be the most sacred incentive for a person seeking independence to continue searching in order to find the path, which might consist of something completely different than writing a letter to someone: You, give me instructions - that is very uncomfortable for many readers of the book. They do not search enough in the book. And so this book, How to Know Higher Worlds, is one of the most widely read books in the German-speaking world today, and has been translated into many foreign languages, despite the fact that it is one of the most misunderstood books. And yet it is child's play to understand if you just let it sink in without prejudice. And don't translate it into materialistic comfort.

To some extent, people today are looking for what they are accustomed to seeking in other areas. How deeply ingrained it has become in people today not to help themselves, that is, not to learn what can help them in one situation or another, but to be helped and not to worry about the principles by which they are helped. Why should we trouble ourselves today about the best way to live in terms of our health? We let ourselves be prescribed for by someone who is there for that purpose, and then we do not need to check the principles according to which he prescribes; we hand over our fate to the one who is set up as an authority. Why should we not be particularly inclined to surrender our destiny to someone else when we are on the spiritual path, the most important human path? But what if the very work that inspires us to do so is dedicated above all to making the human soul independent!

It may be said that scientific research in particular has reached a certain level today, and that this level of scientific research would be accessible to those who are called upon today to represent the natural sciences if most of them did not simply become absorbed in their subject and did not go beyond the boundaries of their subject. If only, I might say, a dozen of the official representatives — and only these are listened to today — would make an honest effort to examine with the most profound honesty what is contained in my 'Occult Science: An Outline of the Fundamental Principles of the Science of Man and Nature', ' and in my 'Theosophy', they would find everything confirmed from the side that can be characterized by saying: Look at life, whether life does not confirm what can be experienced through spiritual science, what is sought here from the spiritual world! — Anyone who really masters natural science today comes to the verification of what anthroposophically oriented spiritual science gives. This is absolutely a truth. But we are faced with the peculiar fact that precisely those who could undertake such an examination are absolutely not concerned about it, have not been concerned about it until now — I am ignoring those who, in our circles, have received the stimulus for it — that no one has set themselves the task of really testing the spiritual-scientific results of anthroposophy against the, fully understood, natural-scientific research of the present! The spiritual-scientific research really has no need to fear this test; it will pass it. It should only be employed, it will be passed. But admittedly, in a time when one is not even inclined to go into the most primitive truths, this test will perhaps take a long time.

The urge not only to be logical, but to be realistic, that is, to form one's judgment not only according to abstract logic, but by immersing oneself in reality, this urge is possessed by few in our present time. Many strive to be logical, but only after going behind logic a certain way is it possible to see the scope of logic itself; otherwise one does not even realize what confusion one can create with such very consistent judgments. You see, it is logical to be always consistent with one's own judgment or consistent with someone else's judgment, but it can lead to rather strange collisions. Charles V, the Austrian, and the French king Francis I came to the same conclusion. They were, so to speak, in complete agreement with regard to a certain idea that they wanted to realize. Francis said: “My dear brother wants exactly the same as I do. We both want exactly the same thing. — They both wanted to conquer Milan! Yes, you see, you notice it — namely when you say the postscript. But that such judgments are swarming around and dominate precisely contemporary thinking, to the detriment of this present, few in the present have the inclination to even think of it.

It is remarkable how – forgive the philistine image – enlightened minds today sometimes approach judgment by going at it from the wrong end, as if someone were to put a horse's bridle on by the tail instead of by the head. But such a bridling is immediately accepted if the person concerned is officially authorized. Anyone with a sense for the living in thinking, feeling and willing could have suffered real torments for many years from the way much thinking is done in the present. I still remember hearing my first lecture in Vienna on elliptic function theory – forgive the word, but it depends on the mind of the person what I want to express, and not on whether one or the other understands what I am using now. So I heard lectures by Professor Leo Königsberger, who was already famous at the time. He was so famous that after being appointed a professor he could write to the government right away to request to be appointed a court councillor, not just a professor. So when I attended his first lecture, he came to the question: What about numbers? People assume positive and negative numbers. Positive numbers correspond to the money I have, negative numbers to the money I don't have, the money I owe. But there are other numbers. Now mathematicians use a line with an O in the middle to denote positive and negative numbers: plus 1, plus 2; minus 1, minus 2. And then the famous Gauss added a new line of numbers so that you can fill the plane with different types of numbers. I don't want to talk about the justification of this number level, but Leo Königsberger began his lecture on elliptic functions by saying, “It could now be that someone would say today that one could just as well take numbers perpendicular to this plane.” When I, as a very young badger of sixteen or seventeen, learned about the story of the plane of numbers, I immediately raised an objection: I said that then one could also think of space as being filled with numbers. The teacher kindly reassured me by saying, “Well, just wait until the next few centuries!” — which, of course, made a great impression on me, the young badger. Now I heard Leo Königsberger in Vienna address the same question. He said, “Let's assume there are these three types of numbers, not just the numbers that lie in the plane of the two lines, but the numbers that lie in the third dimension. We hypothetically assume that such numbers exist, and I would multiply such a number by another number. Now I will show you that when you multiply them, the product can sometimes be zero. But since that can never be the case, there can be no such number. Well, you see, having to listen to this is torture. I don't want to talk about whether the whole story is right or not, but if you accept one thing and don't accept the other, and claim that because the product is zero, there can be no such number, then having to listen to this is torture, because of course the correct thing is that if you have two numbers that equal zero, you have to assume that zero can be created by multiplication, not the opposite; that is the most obvious thing. But whether these judgments live in mathematics, whether these judgments live in political notes, for example in Mr. Wilson's notes, they always lead back to the same forms of thought. But if these forms of judgment live in those judgments that want to be effective for the fate of humanity, then an error in judgment means something quite different from an error in a merely limited scientific speculation, as it is in many respects the teaching of Leo Königsberger.

It must be emphasized, as it is characteristic of our time, that people do not want to adapt their judgment to reality. They do not want to live in reality because they do not want to in the simplest things. They want to assume that the simplest things are what they want, not what reality dictates. It is of the greatest importance that we should learn to think differently in many respects, in order to escape from much of the mischief of the present time. We must learn not merely to think differently, but to think differently. If people with their old habits of thinking could really grasp anthroposophically oriented spiritual science, then they would be able to familiarize themselves more quickly with spiritual scientific truths. But these should not be grasped with the old habits of thinking, but rather with the new thinking, and people find that extremely difficult.

Now, these are some of the reasons why it is so difficult at present to get through with anthroposophically oriented spiritual science, simply because it has to confront the very, very nearest prejudices. But precisely because this is the case, spiritual science is not really fought against, because, it must be admitted, the fight against spiritual science is on very shaky ground. Go and look for those scientific discussions that seriously and thoroughly try to deal with spiritual science as it stands; go and look for treatises or the like of this caliber! Anyone who has ever looked into it will see how little there is in this direction. But perhaps it is not convenient to proceed in this way. You see, a few years ago a student told me that he was preparing to do his doctorate in philosophy at a very well-known university: he wanted to write a dissertation that had been recommended to him by a famous professor. This dissertation was to be about the great Russian thinker Solowjow. At that time, not much more had been printed by Solowjow than a few things that had been published by Nina Hoffmann; much more came out later. I asked the student: Why does the professor advise you to write your dissertation about this Solowjow? “Yes,” said the student, ‘the professor knows nothing about this philosopher and would like to learn something.’ ‘So that's the best way: you let the student write a doctoral thesis on Solovyov, if the student knows Russian; then you learn something about him.’ So the doctoral thesis on Solovyov was written. But a great many doctoral theses are written out of the same sentiment. In many cases, this is a maxim for how topics for doctoral theses are given. But in this way a certain scientific attitude is cultivated, one might say bred. The professor in question could only have really got to know Solowjow if he had intended not only to be a professor of philosophy but also to get to know contemporary philosophy through one of its most outstanding representatives. He would have had to try to study Solowjow himself as best he could, even though only a small part of Solowjow's work has been translated and he does not know Russian himself. It is an uncomfortable path, but it can be said that for many people who want to come to their own conclusions about spiritual science, the path to getting to know spiritual science is much more uncomfortable today. Because there is still a difference between a professor having a dissertation written about Soloviev or about spiritual science. With Soloviev it is still more or less possible to form an opinion by the time the dissertation is finished, because the student is well trained to give this opinion in the sense in which philosophy is taught. But what should a modern professor do with a dissertation about spiritual science, for example? He would be completely at a loss. And even more uncomfortable, of course, is the way of not getting to know the subject indirectly through a dissertation, but rather by studying the subject itself exhaustively in some way.

But all these things are no obstacle for the honest seeker of truth in the present day; he may be longing for spiritual science. Many of you know this, my dear friends. But for most people in today's world, it is an obstacle to recognize this spiritual science, to do anything other than to drill this spiritual science to the ground. They do not approach it, and since it does not come from them, it must be drilled to the ground. You cannot do that in a matter-of-fact way; today, the facts already show that. For those who have tried to approach spiritual science have not, as a rule, become opponents; they have certainly not become blind followers, but they have not become opponents either. There are those too. But a large part of our contemporaries simply have a personal interest in extinguishing this spiritual science, in making it impossible in the present. If they try to do this through honest literary debate, using whatever arguments they have against it, whatever arguments someone else has, then of course there is nothing to be said against it. But that is just what they do not want, it is too inconvenient. It is much more convenient to play the whole thing over into the personal sphere, not to talk about what is said in spiritual science, but to talk about all kinds of other things. And that, you see, is precisely what is being attempted in our immediate present today and will be attempted more and more in the near future, and to which I would like to draw your attention. Because this will lead to a situation in which numerous dissatisfied people, who become dissatisfied for personal reasons within our society, can easily be turned into tools for those who want to eliminate anthroposophy from the world, but do not strive for it in an honest way – they would not achieve their goal by honest means either – they do not strive for scientific discussion, but avoid the honest path, and instead seek to attach some kind of scandal to the spiritual science movement and to personalize everything.

Since my time for talking about factual matters has expired, so that no one can say that I am taking up your time for matters related to the Society and its interests instead of dealing with the factual questions, I may add the following now: There are more and more people who are suitable to be used by those who are characterized in this way, and if one is honest about anthroposophically oriented spiritual science, one has an obligation to point out these things more precisely.

There is a person – many years ago his name first appeared before our eyes – who comes from a small town. One day Dr. Steiner received a letter, as they so often occur: “I feel unhappy in my situation, I would like to improve my situation”. And one of the letters that had this tone asked for advice on how the person concerned should act: whether he would do better to marry into a house or a business, or whether he should seek his way in the world in some other way. Yes, you have to tell the truth, unembellished, if you want to get to the bottom of things, and if you do not want to be blind to what will happen in the near future. Now it was made clear to the man that we cannot deal with the question of whether he should marry into a family or not, but since he did not let up, we willingly provided him with some information that was suitable to meet his need for spiritual instruction, which he claimed to have. By devoting himself to such spiritual things as he imagined them to be, he very soon came to the conclusion that it would be beneath a great mind like his to take care of a business in a small town. He longed for larger circles. He had apparently saved some money and came to Berlin. He found that

"It is quite nice to pursue the humanities alone, but he also felt a special artistic talent in himself, and he now demanded that society promote this. It's nice to help people, isn't it. The samples that the person in question gave of his art spoke against any talent, but some people learn so much even without talent that it sometimes meets strict requirements. And so it came about that the person in question was recommended to various members who could create this or that for him, that he should be supported. But it always turned out that the matter failed precisely because the person in question wanted to practice an art but not learn anything, because he thought he could do more than all the teachers who wanted to take care of him. And the consequence was that, because he ran away from every teacher, in the end nothing could be done at all. One had indulgence after indulgence, but nothing special could be done, nothing pleased the person concerned. For, of course, in his eyes this was again such a blatant case of how the world misunderstands the nascent genius! That no one else could honestly share this view, yes, my dear friends, it was truly not our fault. That is the main thing, all other things are secondary. And so it was with this person as it is with many. They first seek advancement within our society, and when this advancement is not granted to them according to their mind, they become opponents. And then they come forward with all kinds of things. Of course, they never talk about what is behind things. They come up with all kinds of things that are best refuted by first explaining the reasons. Of course, in this case it was pure offended vanity and incompetence. And everything else that was added as a fuss was the most foolish invention, the most foolish fantasy. But today, of course, you find the journals that take up these things. Because the person I mean is called Erich Bamler. And if you really get to the bottom of things in such undertakings, then you don't need to take on such an essay, which mostly doesn't mean anything, because all the individual things don't express what they say, but

41n0 they arise from quite different things. And it is actually foolish to seriously want to refute the non-essential. Because that is not what is important, but what lies behind it.

Let us take another case: a man who is not exactly lacking in vanity found himself years ago, after first objecting to anthroposophy in general, in this anthroposophy. I was the very last person to have sought out this personality. He presented himself. It turned out that there were many things that did not exactly mean that this personality was striving for completely impersonal goals in our society. That cannot be demanded, of course, so it cannot be criticized if sometimes personal goals are also accommodated to some extent. Sometimes such personal aims are accommodated because in this way many people can be led to what is right after all. And so it happened that at first the person concerned was quite satisfied with us. He wrote a pamphlet, in fact. I even condescended to write an epilogue to it, and the pamphlet was also taken up by our publishing house. He was on good terms with us; we were people who could be talked to. Then the person in question had another work printed, and after this work had had various fates, which are now of no concern to us, he offered it to the Philosophical-Anthroposophical Publishing House again. However, it was impossible to include this work in the Philosophical-Anthroposophical Publishing House. On the first pages of this writing, it says that I had only hinted at certain things about the Christ problem, and that the gentleman in question would like to elaborate on them. I am not saying this out of hurt vanity, although in this case I am being accused of it; but the sentence in which it is attributed to me is a blatant untruth, because the matter mentioned did not take place. Without taking into account the fact that I might have had reason not to go further, things are then elaborated in a way that may remind one of another story that took place, of which this story is at least a miniature version. I will have to come back to this other story as well, and I will do so briefly in a moment. In this writing by the gentleman in question, all kinds of things that I had only said in lectures were simply stated. Dr. Steiner was quite right to take umbrage at this and rejected the manuscript for publication. And because his manuscript was rejected, the man became an opponent. Now, of course, if you are writing an article for a journal, you cannot say: The Anthroposophical Society is fundamentally bad because the Philosophical-Anthroposophical Publishing House rejected my manuscript. That won't do! But that would have been the truth! So, despite the fact that the person concerned has been informed about the matter countless times, the fairy tale about contradictions is invented. The person concerned knows very well what the situation is regarding these contradictions, but he writes newspaper articles about them! What these newspaper articles say is of no significance, because the person concerned did not become an opponent because of this matter. He could have known about this long before he joined. He became an opponent for the stated reason. Some doubt whether one can so easily make the hypothesis: What is afterwards is also causally conditioned by what went before; but it remains conspicuous, nevertheless, that the antagonism of Mr. Max Seiling followed immediately upon the rejection of his writing by our publishing house. Of course it is easy to deny such a thing, to object to it in all sorts of ways, but it is not a matter of what one or the other objects to, but of what the facts are.

It is indeed reminiscent of a somewhat more ingenious case; this is only a miniature version of it. The more ingenious case is that of a gentleman who had been to America but is a good European. He was summoned here to Germany by a long-standing member and listened to all kinds of lectures. He tried hard to get the lectures that had been given years ago by demanding them from this person or that. After he had faithfully packed up everything he had copied, he went back to America. He said there that he had been here, that he had familiarized himself with my teaching, but that he could not be satisfied with my teaching, but had to go much deeper, so one would find in his work many things that are not yet to be found in my books. For when he had exhausted everything that could be found with me, he was called to a master who dwells somewhere in the Transylvanian Alps; he then told him many things that he is now incorporating into his book. But now everything that he incorporated into his book was what he had overheard here in the lectures and copied down! And then the book was called: “Rosicrucian Worldview”. It was published in America and caused a great stir: the book, that was a combination of what he had heard from me here, and what the master was supposed to have told him in the Transylvanian Alps. People did not need to check what I had said, nor could they, because it had been said in part in our internal lectures. But not only did this appear as a book written in English and American, but a German bookshop was also found that translated the book and published it as “Weltanschauung der Rosenkreuzer” (The Rosicrucians' World View). The editor was Dr. Vollrath.

These are just a few examples of how it is done, my dear friends! These things may well be pointed out. Attention must be paid to them, because they show the means by which, on the one hand, we make use of what is growing on our soil and, on the other, how we fight it. It may well be said that perhaps never before have worse means been used to fight against anything than are now being used to fight against us, especially against anthroposophically oriented spiritual science! You will therefore understand that we have been forced, as it were, to resort to the only means of averting the disaster, although it may not bring about any improvement if everyone joins forces to cause the greatest possible difficulties for the personalities associated with the matter. But one thing must be considered: too much has been said about this matter, but always actually for deaf ears. Therefore, there is no other choice than to submit to a certain iron necessity in order to serve the matter, to which we must all be devoted, in an appropriate way. This iron necessity simply arises. Suppose spiritual science were to appear as literature, were there as literature. It would then be quite impossible – in theory it is possible, but in view of the concrete facts it would be quite impossible – for all these things to attach themselves to spiritual science, as they have done and will continue to do in the most terrible and unworthy manner. What we have to distinguish from the spiritual science movement, which wants to be a pure knowledge movement, a world view movement of the present day, is the Anthroposophical Society. The idea of the Anthroposophical Society is a good one, but in practice, as I see it, it is developing in many ways, not as I see it, but as the facts teach us, in many ways, so that every day we are confronted with things that show, and this is no exaggeration, how within this Anthroposophical Society, cliques develop with a certain ease, especially personal interests for and against, in the most extensive way. It is difficult to separate personal interests from purely factual ones in the context of a society. But think that precisely through the social activities, the floodgates are opened to those people who do not want to confront spiritual science through honest discussion, but who want to bring down spiritual science by the detour of personal defamation, through personal slander. Because one can say this: they want to bring down spiritual science.

Years ago, I decided to accommodate the wishes of various members for personal meetings, to the youngest and oldest members in the broadest way. Only in recent years, when things were already so close, did I sometimes have to deviate sporadically from the old practice; but only sporadically, in exceptional cases. Despite the fact that it has been emphasized time and again that what is available in the literature and what is said here in the lectures contains plenty of material that the individual needs for his or her own development, so that personal consultations could only relate to an expression from person to person to person, it will happen time and again that the most outrageous lies — excuse the expression — are told within the Society in connection with the personal contact of members with me, and outsiders then seek ways to all kinds of defamation and slander. By this I mean that all too often within the Society people are quite inclined to use a nice-sounding little word for their own deep satisfaction when they have one. How good it does some people, for example, when they can say: I have become an esoteric disciple. — And how good it does some people when they can say: Yes, you know, that is something very mysterious, I am not allowed to tell you that; I am not allowed to tell you anything about it. — Putting oneself in the limelight, giving oneself a certain prestige, that is what is behind many an expression that is used and which is then often misused by outsiders in a quite malicious way. All these things, which are now being used with malicious intent, could never have happened if what was being put in a false light were not in line with legitimate desires and perhaps an equally legitimate accommodation of these desires, but which, in view of what the outside world is making of it, cannot be maintained, however difficult it may be for me, my dear friends. Of course, everyone can maintain friendly relations in society, but the iron necessity compels me to stop giving private audiences. I am particularly sorry for this because some will say: Why should the innocent suffer with the guilty? But if you are in a society, that is of course the karma of the society, and the matter cannot be done differently. All those private conversations that were sought out, in view of those malicious slanders, must simply stop. |

Don't think that I am any less sorry for that than you are, but I know that, just as everything I have said about such things was spoken in vain, my speaking today would also be spoken in vain if measures were not taken that simply force people to realize the seriousness of the matter.

It is easy to fabricate slanderous stories about what is said in private conversations with individual members, if these slanderous stories reach the point where, for example, it is said here or there that this or that member has been hypnotized. Now, my dear friends, in the face of these things I shall have to take a different line altogether, from which you will see — and I am really speaking out of a simple sense of duty towards our movement — that I am now and in this matter, in the very bitterest seriousness, for the sake of the sanctity of spiritual science. If a movement like this is based simply on the principle of not encroaching on anyone's sphere of freedom, and if this is strictly observed, if everything that encroaches on a person's sphere of freedom is strictly rejected, and if one then proceeds with these very things, then it is necessary that one day everything that is to grow on our soil will grow in the full light of day. When things grow in full public view, then the ground will be cut from under the slanderers. But there will be no other method in the future. Therefore, I will strive, as far as it depends on me, to ensure that in the future anthroposophically oriented spiritual science will increasingly take place in the full light of the public. It does not have to shy away from the public. And today I declare explicitly: With regard to the private conversations that have taken place with members for years, I release everyone from the promise not to speak about the content of the conversation. Everyone can share, as much as they themselves find appropriate, what has ever occurred in a private conversation with a member. Nothing will be found that should be kept from the light of day. Then one will no longer be able to pussyfoot around with things that are on the following ground. I will give you an example of how these things can be used against the most blatant ignorance and the will to be most blatantly ignorant.

Not only Erich Bamler, but also others who are fighting just as “honestly” as he is, have put forward and basically believe that among all sorts of esoteric principles this one would also have been given to them: “Look at everything around you in the light of necessity, as if it were necessary, as a given necessary fate.” It is comforting for a time, as long as one believes oneself to be supported within society, when one has been given such a rule to say: “I am an esoteric disciple, for I meditate continually: ‘See everything around you in the light of necessity’.” But why has this rule been given to those people, why has this rule been advised to them? For the simple reason that they needed it according to the state of their soul! It was a piece of advice that did not encroach on their freedom at all, but a piece of advice whose scope and esotericism you may judge if I point out the following to you: Schopenhauer says in his essay on the freedom of the will, towards the end of his essay, concerning our attitude towards the course of the world and fate: “Everything that happens, from the greatest to the smallest, happens necessarily”; and he speaks of the calming effect of the realization of the inevitable and necessary. So people have been advised to do nothing other than what Schopenhauer himself considers a proven way of overcoming certain forms of depression.

Now, when speculating on the most blatant ignorance and on the will to the most blatant ignorance, people can, of course, be told all kinds of beautiful fairy tales: that one has turned green and blue, especially in the legs, by following such principles. And for those who want to make something esoteric out of thin air, these things can, of course, be used as slander. But precisely when we know that the things that are being done in anthroposophically oriented spiritual science are actually required by necessary needs, then we will be able to understand that such a measure as the one mentioned above must one day be taken, simply for the reason that it must be seen that the things at issue are meant seriously. Do not complain to me, who feels it just as hard as you do; complain to those whom I have clearly pointed out to you, and who make it impossible for such a measure to be avoided. Today it is very difficult for me, for reasons of principle, to have to refuse private conversations, which numerous members desire. Of course I also know that this will in turn be used against me, but I cannot act according to personal reasons, but according to what is necessary for our movement. That means that I must submit to the principle of taking what is said seriously, for whatever reason it may be taken as a pretext for calumny or slander by those who do not honestly want to refute spiritual science but who want to do away with it in some other way.

Examine much of what has occurred; you will find that the causes always come from society. It is very rare for society to be attacked; the point of attack is usually me or my immediate surroundings. Examine the things. But by attacking me, it is the case that they want to attack spiritual science in me. Because one way or another, it is of no importance to them whether a foolish esoteric piece of advice is given here or there; there are enough of those in the world. But what people do care about is that spiritual science in the anthroposophical orientation is a cultural factor of our time, that it wants to have a say. People do care about that. They do not care about esoteric Winkel esoterics, but they do care about someone who, according to his destiny, cannot remain an esoteric Winkel esoteric. You would not want to meet an esoteric Winkel esoteric if he sat in front of fifty people in Berlin and gave them advice. The attacks only began when the number of books exceeded a certain number. It would be a sin against the spirit of anthroposophically oriented spiritual science to let it perish when it might be possible to prevent it by having to do without certain things, perhaps only for a while, because the morality of people today turns out the way it has now turned out.

We have often seen how things are misrepresented; but how it is done in the case of anthroposophically oriented spiritual science, how things are invented that are not there at all and something quite different from what has taken place is told, that is one of the greatest rarities, even in the history of mankind.

All this is not said to, as they say in Austria, grumble or gripe, or to some extent to rant, but it is said because the symptoms are now appearing daily that the intention is to put an end to our spiritual movement in the way indicated, and because the tendency must arise to see the snowball at the top, and not just the avalanche when it has reached the bottom. Just a few hours before I came here, among other things, a letter was read to me in which it was once again related that two people had come together; I will not mention any names, so such a case can simply be cited as an example. The one is accused of hypnotizing the other, of even sitting behind the other and meditating into the other's neck so that all kinds of harmful things arise in the soul of the person concerned. And then the matter is pursued further. It is only one case, the last one, no, not the last one, there was another one after that, but it is the one that I read about three hours ago. Today it is a harmless matter, but in a few years it may no longer be so: that one person is supposed to have sat behind another in order to meditate all kinds of harmful things into the neck of the other person and thereby exert influence. There is no doubt that the person concerned is as harmless as possible in this matter. But today, my dear friends, this plays between two members; in a few years it will be made into a “Steiner case”, which in turn provides a very nice case for such “studies”. Perhaps it will happen more quickly and will not take a few years.

So, please understand that I am truly faced with an extremely difficult dilemma if I have to resort to saying, on the one hand, that an attempt must be made to make spiritual science fully public. Nobody will be left wanting as a result, nobody will somehow not find what they need to find because everything is in the public domain. But all the gossip: that is something mysteriously mystical, you must not say that and so on – that should no longer be able to give rise to all kinds of slander. No matter how friendly our dealings may be, they must not be any other than those between friends for the time being, because private conversations must stop as a matter of principle for the time being. Perhaps this will force our dear members, however inconvenient it may be, to pay a little more attention to things and take care of the matters that have been neglected so far.

As I said, please forgive me for bringing up these matters here today; I only did so after the actual lecture was already over, but I had to bring them up because they are related to the vital issues of the Anthroposophical Society and the anthroposophical movement. This, and not any lack of friendliness, is why I very much regret not being able to hold the private conversations with our dear members, which I have always been happy to do, in the near future. Then it will not be possible, really not possible in the concrete, to create what the malicious enemies are so keen to seek. — Because, my dear friends, you could of course make an objection, and everyone does it of their own accord in an understandable way, namely by saying: But he could talk to me. This has been said by each of those who are now launching their attacks in the most abusive manner; and some of those who are now the tools of their protectors were brought into society by very, very respected members of society. In some respects, it must change, but it can only change through the members.

It is certainly understandable that in the soul of the present man, more than is perhaps otherwise the case, the need arises to understand time in its peculiarity. We are living in a time when events are taking place that not only demand the most tremendous sacrifices from many people, but which truly present human thought with difficult riddles, riddles of the most diverse kinds. Why did these things have to reveal themselves in our age in such a terrible catastrophe as it is now going through the development of mankind? This is certainly a question that touches the souls of today. We see the outer events well; we must only try to prepare ourselves more and more, not only to seek the proximate causes for such momentous events, but to turn our eyes to the deeper forces of the time, and to how these deeper forces are grounded in the overall development of humanity. Then we may perhaps also understand much that otherwise remains incomprehensible to us, that we can only stare at, so to speak.

Let us ask ourselves: What is a serious characteristic of our time in the deepest sense? — Well, we certainly cannot deny from discussions that have often been held here that in recent times, in all fields, what we call materialism, materialism in the broadest sense of the word, has emerged. Materialism! — today, let us not understand it in the sense of only directing our feelings, our sympathy and our antipathy to that which we label with the term materialism; rather, let us try to sense that an age had to come when materialism, so to speak, set the tone in the development of humanity. Humanity needed materialism, the passage through materialism. It must not lose itself within materialism; it must not, as it were, surrender to this materialism to such an extent that it loses the connection with the spiritual world not only out of sight but also out of mind. To ensure that this does not happen, to ensure that the connection with the spiritual world is maintained, is precisely the task of spiritual science. Today I would like to try to bring before you some of the developmental laws of the human race, which, if we understand them in the right way, can help us to understand what is happening around us.

That we live in the age of materialism is by no means due merely to the wickedness and depravity of the human soul at large, but to certain laws of development. Admittedly, the face of materialism in our age is not a beautiful one, especially when we can compare this materialistic face with the cultural face of older periods. Nevertheless, no one should fall back into reactionary thinking and believe that the old cultural developments should be brought back. What is quite significant for us about the nature of materialism in our time is that even outstanding, spiritually significant personalities cannot bring their soul impulses to an understanding of the spiritual world. They simply cannot. We must admit this to ourselves without prejudice. Let us take a typical example from the 19th century, a man who was much talked about in the second half of the 19th century in the international intellectual life of Europe: Ernest Renan, who endeavored to understand the Christ Impulse in a way that was possible for his time. Ernest Renan's 'Life of Jesus' caused a great sensation in the widest circles and had a great influence. But Ernest Renan is, on the one hand, a spirit who was serious about spiritual matters, but on the other hand, he could not form any ideas about the fact that man can find a way to an understanding of spiritual worlds. Let us take a saying that Ernest Renan made at a fairly young age; he said: “The man of the present is aware that he will never know anything about the highest causes of the universe and about his own destiny.” This is a leading spirit of the present day who speaks in this way, who actually presents it as an important insight when man becomes aware that he can never know anything about the causes of the universe and about his destiny. And he was not a superficial man, this Ernest Renan. He lived a life of insight. And it is characteristic that the old Renan, the Renan who had become an old man, made another characteristic statement. This man, who throughout his life immersed himself in the belief that man cannot find his way into the spiritual world, indeed, he had to impress this on himself as a higher realization, said at the end of his life: I wish I knew for sure that there was a hell, because better the hypothesis of hell than that of nothingness. There you see something spoken from the compressed heart of the present. Nothingness stares at man when he has the yearning, the desire to gain a spiritual world, a spiritual world into which man could enter when he passes through the gate of death. And a person who believes that he has achieved the state of being above such things, that he can do without such knowledge, who at the end of his life says: It would be better to know that there is a hell than to look at nothingness. — One must empathize with such things if one wants to feel characteristic of our time.

But we must be clear about one thing: humanity needs leading minds in every age. In ancient times it was the mystery priests, and in our age it is certain philosophers who are increasingly taking on a scientific character. A philosopher whom I knew very well said the following in his last work, “The Tragicomedy of Wisdom”: He says: We have no more philosophy than an animal and differ from the animal only in the frantic attempts to want to come to a knowledge, and by the final surrender to the non-knowledge. — The person concerned, who has thus come to the conclusion from his digging in the spiritual life that man cannot have more philosophy than an animal, has become a professor of philosophy and a university professor. Therefore, it is not surprising that, on the other hand, natures of a more profound bent want to seek some way into the spiritual world, and that, because they cannot bring themselves to do so, they throw themselves into the arms of the nearest thing, so to speak, that is offered to them by the impulses of the age, arising out of materialism. We see this from numerous such examples in our own time, such as Maurice Barrès, the Frenchman who has now also attained a certain fame among the crazed haters of the Germans during the war. Before the war, he was the typical leader of those young Frenchmen who, as far as possible, sought a path to spirituality. Maurice Barrès searched for a long time, and after a long search, he threw himself into the arms of popular Catholicism, the Catholic Church, as many young Frenchmen have done. In the end, it is only one particular example of a widespread trend, as it lives in our time and has come to expression in his becoming Catholic. But let us now try to look into the soul of a man like Maurice Barrès and see how he approaches the search for the spiritual life. I must say that the following is a characteristic saying of this Maurice Barrès. So a modern seeker of the spirit let the following words slip: “It is a futile effort to seek the beyond. It may not even exist!” And then he continues: “And however we approach it, we cannot learn anything about it. Let us leave all occultism to the enlightened and the conjurers. Whatever form mysticism takes, it contradicts reason. But we still give ourselves to the Church, firstly because it is inextricably linked with the tradition of France, and secondly because, with the authority of centuries and great practical experience, it formulates the will of that ethic that must be taught to the people and the Church, and finally because, far from delivering us to mysticism, , it directly defends us against it, silencing the voice of the mysterious groves” - by mysterious groves he means everything that has come out of the mysteries - ‘and interpreting the Gospels, sacrificing the generous anarchism of the Savior to the needs of modern society.’

Why should we surrender to the Catholic Church? Because it has understood, he says, to sacrifice the generous worldview of the Savior to the lukewarm needs of modern humanity, that is, to adapt Christianity quite well to those who want the same thing from Christianity that an average Christian experiences with his or her Christianity today. If one did not understand that there is a certain necessity for arriving at such a view, then one would have to call such a view, in the extreme, frivolous, cynical and frivolous. But that deeper minds in particular arrive at such a view, one should feel, and that is necessary to feel. We can only ask ourselves one question: What is the deeper cause? What is the deeper cause that it is so difficult for people today to find their way into the spiritual world? — Here we must once again turn our soul's gaze to the development of humanity, at least in the time that has elapsed since the great Atlantean catastrophe and in the fifth period of which we are living.

We have so far divided this development of humanity into the first period, which we have called the ancient Indian, the second, which we have called the pre-Persian, the third, which we have called the Egyptian-Chaldean-Babylonian, the fourth, which we have called the Greek-Latin, and finally we have our fifth period; we live in it. In this fifth period, the very things have come about that we have hinted at from a certain point of view. I have tried at various times to characterize the development of humanity in order to place the present in this development of humanity. Today I will do so from a different point of view. This other point of view may again seem quite paradoxical when first considered, but let us at least take it up without prejudice for the time being. Let us try to equip ourselves with the way of looking at things that we can already have after having developed so many years of anthroposophy.

From what we have already absorbed into our souls, we can know that not only does the individual human being undergo a development in the physical world between birth and death, but that humanity itself also undergoes a development. Today, we are considering the fifth period of that development that follows the Atlantic catastrophe, in the manner just characterized. The paradox will arise when we ask ourselves: Can we speak of an evolution in time in a more precise way for humanity, for a part of human development, just as we speak of such a development in time for the individual human being? — We say: A person will first develop in such a way that he lives through the first seven years from the first to the seventh year. Then he lives through the period from the seventh to the fourteenth year – taken approximately, you know what is meant by that – then from the fourteenth to the twenty-first year, and so on. In a sense, the human being develops in stages, adding one year from birth to death each time a year has passed.

How can we think now, if we want to reflect on the indicated piece of human development? It will be useful if we also ask ourselves: How old is humanity if we want to compare its age with our own individual human age? At what age is today's humanity? It will not be uninteresting to consider this from a spiritual scientific point of view. And it is precisely this spiritual-scientific consideration that will bring us to many things. -— Years ago I have already characterized the same thing. It is the case in spiritual science that one can know many things and only after years can one formulate them properly or can reformulate them. I would like to give you a new formulation of the enigma hinted at today.

Let us first consider schematically how the development was:

First period, the primeval Indian development;
second period, the primeval Persian development;
third period, the Egyptian-Chaldean-Babylonian development;
fourth period, the Greek-Latin development;
the fifth period is ours; then comes the sixth.

If we now compare the age of humanity with the individual ages of man, how old was humanity in the first period after the Atlantic catastrophe? How old was it then? You see, if we knew how old all of humanity was, then we could compare how we have to see ourselves, how we place ourselves in the development of humanity with our life ages. It was not at all easy to investigate this question from a spiritual scientific point of view. One had to look first at the purely spiritual scientific fact, had to connect a meaning with this purely spiritual scientific fact of the first period. And when one had gained an insight into the particular spiritual configuration of humanity as it was at that time, then one had to ask: to which individual, personal age would this configuration of that time be comparable? And there you find out that humanity as humanity – not the individual human being, we will talk about that later – that humanity in this first post-Atlantean period has an age that can be compared to today's human age between the forty-eighth and fifty-sixth year. So you see, if you take the spiritual configuration of what was cultural life at that time, you come to the conclusion that humanity back then had an age that can be compared to today's age of man, and of course woman, from the forty-eighth to the fifty-sixth year. It was not very easy to get this information, but once it was available, it is an actual result of spiritual science.

Now the question is: What about the second, the original Persian period? The same observation had to be made again. It turns out that if you consider the nature of what was culture back then, it can only be compared to the age between forty-two and forty-eight years of age today. And if we now move on to the Egyptian-Chaldean-Babylonian era, which ends around 747 BC, this corresponds to the human age from thirty-five to forty-two years. When we come to the Greco-Latin period, this corresponds to the human age from twenty-eight to thirty-five years. And when we come to our fifth, post-Atlantic age, this corresponds to the individual human age between twenty-one and twenty-eight years. And in the sixth period, we can predict that the sixth age will correspond to the age between the fourteenth and twenty-first year; and in the last period, before a new great catastrophe, the age from the seventh to the fourteenth year.

I may well confess to you, my dear friends, that the result that emerged when it was formulated was truly one of the most surprising things I actually came up with, one of the most surprising things. Because, isn't it true, it is based on a strange fact: while man is ascending in numbers, the development of mankind is descending. Strangely enough, humanity is getting younger and younger! That's right: humanity is getting younger and younger.

Now, of course, one has to ask oneself: what does all this mean on a broader scale? There are many developmental puzzles associated with this matter. I asked myself first: What does it mean for the first cultural period that humanity was between the ages of forty-eight and fifty-six? The following emerges: Of course, the people who were born and lived at that time first became one, two, three years old. That is clear. But then they also reached the age of forty-eight. For each person there came a time when they lived between the forty-eighth and fifty-sixth year of the individual development. And then these people could say to themselves: Now we are personally entering an age where we have the personal characteristics of old age that are contained all around us in the group spirit of all humanity. We grow into what is in our environment. Earlier, before the age of forty-eight, we had, so to speak, completed a development that belonged to us, that was for us; but at the age of forty-eight we grow into what is in our environment. If you then became older than fifty-six, you continued to develop, you just lived on and, in a sense, grew back into what was there before the Atlantic catastrophe. You then went through something that went beyond what was revealed in the group soul of humanity around you. So at the age of forty you found the connection to the group soul of humanity.

In the next, in the second cultural period, this connection was found earlier. Then one became forty-two years old and grew into what was in the environment, grew into what was aurically in all of humanity.

And then, at the age of thirty-five, you grew into it, so that between the ages of thirty-five and forty-two you could say to yourself: Now what is in me is in harmony with what is around me. After the age of forty-two, what was around you could no longer give you anything, so you had to live on out of yourself, so to speak, because the age of humanity had become so much younger. In the period from the age of forty-two onwards, you were no longer in the environment; you grew beyond it, you had to rely on yourself.

Thus the ancient Greeks and Romans were dependent on themselves when they reached the age of thirty-five. Between the ages of twenty-eight and thirty-five, he lived with his environment, and then humanity had nothing more to add to its age, because that was lived out; humanity could no longer become forty-eight years old if it had reached the age of thirty-five and was going backwards.

And we in the fifth period: just think, we live ourselves into the group spirit of humanity, into what our environment is, between the twenty-first and twenty-eighth year. From then on, our environment no longer provides anything. What comes after that, we have to attain through our own development, we have to draw from our inner selves, because nothing more flows to us from the outside. Mankind has covered the years up to the twenty-eighth year, and when we have reached the age of twenty-eight, then, yes, then we must have a fund, then we must have something within us that we can carry forward; otherwise we will never be older than twenty-eight. And now so much of the fifth period has already passed that mankind has just returned to the twenty-seventh year. So that if nothing is done to develop their inner selves energetically and to advance through themselves, people will only live to be twenty-seven years old. That's a lot, my dear friends! That means that if everything is left as it is, today's humanity will not achieve any intellectual or other soul development than that up to the age of twenty-seven. And if something is not poured into their souls to develop them further, then they remain twenty-seven years old for the rest of their lives.

They remain twenty-seven years old for the rest of their lives: that is a great secret of the present development of humanity. In the sixth post-Atlantic period, people do not get older than twenty-one years at all. If nothing is done to expand their inner life, to strengthen their intellect, initiative and will, then a general outbreak of early dementia would result. People would have to remain within a life development that ends at twenty-one years of age: anything later would be merely an insubstantial addition.

Let us consider this in connection with the individuality of the human being. Just think, we all become more and more mature in accordance with our individual, personal inclinations. A child is essentially always a materialist; a young person then becomes an idealist, but their ideals are abstract, they lack substance. Only in later years does one adapt to making such ideals that are immersed in reality, live with reality, that are truly realistic. Suppose a person today is completely a child of his time. What kind of qualities will he be able to show if he was not offered the opportunity in his youth to absorb something spiritual? That alone advances the soul. If he remains subject to the spirit of the age, then such a person's destiny is to make no progress beyond twenty-eight years of development. Whatever comes later stops at twenty-eight. Of course, if one is stimulated, one can progress beyond the twenty-eighth year, but the other is the rule; what I have described is what follows from the law of development. A person who does not advance beyond the age of twenty-eight, who remains twenty-eight years old even though he reaches fifty, fifty-six, or sixty, may under certain circumstances develop great abstract ideals, but he will have gone through only the years of life with their abstract ideals, but not the years of trial, which, in the spiritual sense, turn those who harbor such ideas into practical people, into people who realize how they can be realized, who not only dazzle people with the power of youth but who can realize themselves.

This naturally raises the question: could an example be given of a true child of our time who has grown old but is not beyond the age of twenty-eight? Of course, if one were to give such an example today in the world, which wants nothing to do with spiritual laws that also work in the development of humanity, one would be laughed at as a fool. But here among us, where we have developed so much spiritually, it may perhaps be helpful to speak quite specifically in order to better understand our time. Why should not the spiritual scientist be allowed to speak specifically to those who are his friends and who would like to hear something about the secrets of the time?

After really careful research into our time, I noticed a very characteristic example of a person who, no matter how old they get, is condemned to be no older than twenty-eight years old, and that is the President of the United States, Woodrow Wilson. Yes, you laugh, my dear friends, but for me this was a very significant realization that solves an enormous number of puzzles of our time. I always had to ask myself: Why do the ideals of this man, which he has expressed in various notes to humanity, blind so much, and why do they turn into the opposite of what is written in them? Because they are the ideals of youth, and remain as such, although the man who expresses them grows older. Because they are abstract ideals of youth, which do not want to be related to reality, which do not want to be saturated by reality, and which therefore cannot be applied to real practical life, in which not only the external material, but also the spiritual is at work, especially when it comes to the order of the social structure of humanity. As much as one can think today without what can only be established internally, so much can he think, Woodrow Wilson, no more!

A Wilson of the sixth period would only be able to live to the age of twenty-one, even if he lived to be a hundred years old. But you see, after all, the fact of the matter is this: when we consider the fourth period, the individual, personal age of man, so to speak, meets the descending age of humanity up to the thirty-fifth year at the center of this thirty-fifth year. There it coincides in the middle. Hence the peculiarly harmonious life of the Greeks, and the harmony between the individual life of the Greek and the life of Greek humanity. But now humanity has regressed and no longer passes through the years from the age of twenty-eight onwards. And the human being must go through them individually, really individually.

You see, this is connected with things that lie beyond the physical, sensual world. You can find out more about some of these things in my book 'The Spiritual Guidance of the Human Being and Humanity'. Today I want to present this from a different point of view.

In the first post-Atlantean period, through his individual development, when a person reached the age of forty-eight, he was able to connect with the age of humanity. However, this was connected with the fact that in those days, in this first period, there was still a close contact between certain entities of the higher hierarchies and between humanity here on earth. The entities of the higher hierarchies, which we think of as belonging to the hierarchy of the archai or spirits of personality, still descended to earth at that time, as it were, and united with human development; they inspired, actually intuitized humanity. The fact that humanity was able to develop to the point of only growing into the age of humanity at such a late individual age has resulted in humanity having a special connection with the archai here on earth. In the second post-Atlantic period, there was the same connection with the archangeloi, and in the third with the angeloi. But in the fourth post-Atlantic period, in the Greco-Latin period, people had to rely on themselves. In the third period, it was still the case that the angels, the archangels, descended and inspired people, intuiting them and giving them imaginations. Then came the Greco-Latin period: the spirits of the higher hierarchies no longer descended in the same easy way, so to speak, and people had to start commuting up and down, into the spiritual realm and then back down into the earthly realm. In other words, man had to find himself. But now, in the fifth period, we have entered an epoch in which the opposite must take place. Now we have to strengthen our inner being to such an extent that, during this fifth period, we gradually come close to the angeloi through our own strength, that we encounter them again, but through our own strength, and that the angelos in us sets the impulse for development; that we can find through ourselves what humanity can no longer give us through the higher hierarchies.

There you see why we have materialism in our time. There you see that there have been times when humanity, by being older, by not yet being as young as it is now, reached further up into the spiritual worlds, where it was, so to speak, from the very beginning closer to the spiritual worlds than man is now, when he approaches death, is close to the spiritual worlds. There you see the deeper reason for materialism, but also the necessary impulse to really seek something that can spiritually, individually, stimulate the human being inwardly, that can lead him beyond what he can absorb from his environment.

Even the education that, so to speak, only flows to man by itself cannot possibly give what brings more to man today than a lifespan of twenty-eight years. Therefore, the spiritual conditions must be spiritualized. If things were to continue as they are, if spiritual science were to be thoroughly drilled, if things were to continue as they do naturally, then a general standstill would take hold at the age of twenty-eight. If research were only carried out in natural science laboratories and clinics and only what can be given from the outside were found, if nothing were stimulated in the souls from within, if no science of the spiritual were sunk into the souls, but only what the greatness of modern times, the greatness of materialism, has brought were continued, then progress would finally be such that people would always remain young. But that would only be something if they remained young not only in their inner being but also with their bodies. But with the body they are already growing old. As a result, what lives in them no longer corresponds to the outward physicality.

Today it is still the case that in many respects it is precisely the inadequacy of what we experience with humanity that stimulates certain forces within us. We can only become twenty-eight years old through humanity, but we must live longer in the world in the various incarnations. It is the case that for the time being, when humanity is only twenty-seven years old, there are still forces that are further developed in the time between death and a new birth towards the Angelos. Today it is still like that. But when the sixth period begins, then man on earth will only be able to reach the age of twenty-one through what is around him. What has been developed by the twenty-first year? The physical body by the seventh year, the body of formative forces by the fourteenth year, the sentient body by the twenty-first year: only the bodily nature is developed. The soul, if the person does not develop it from within, the sentient soul, the mind or emotional soul, the consciousness soul: they are then not developed at all. The physical is developed up to the age of twenty-one. Then the human being would lose too much from his own powers to be able to catch up on what he has missed here, if he has not received any spiritual stimulation, even after death, between death and a new birth.

You can see from this that the point of view that humanity attains does not correspond to chance, but that it is a deep necessity, that it corresponds to a surprising law of human development. We can see this in many individual cases today. Indeed, there has never been a time in the development of humanity when people were so reluctant to recognize experience as something that life gives. Everyone today wants to be clever as early as possible. Why? Because deep down he senses that at twenty-eight he must be a finished product. For many people today, absorbing anything after twenty-eight years is an absurd idea, an absurd fact altogether. Then one lives one's life, but one wants to absorb only up to the twenty-eighth year, or even more precisely — and this is true of the facts — up to the twenty-seventh year.

But when we consider such a secret of human development, we also understand that when we speak of the necessity of spiritual development, it is not seen as an arbitrariness, but it is understood in such a way that this necessity really exists, that, so to speak, a person remains imperfect in our time if he does not take up a spiritual impulse. This is felt everywhere, and wherever life is not viewed in its reality. The strange fact that many people are so incapable of even entering into certain lines of thought is based on the fact that people do not even reach the age of thirty-five, that there are so few who can say something that is connected with the more mature experience of later life.

These things must be faced quite impartially and without prejudice, and from them we must draw the impulse to take in spiritual things. If we do not do this, we join those who actually want to condemn humanity to immature youthfulness.

Yes, certain thoughts and insights that come to us from spiritual science are indeed so profound that they seem deeply, deeply incisive to us when we are fully human, but we really only have to be inclined to feel the incisive at every moment. Because it grows out of the incisive, spiritual science, we need not be surprised if this spiritual science meets with resistance. It meets with resistance not only from the stubbornness of people, but from the nature of human development.

I may have told you a few paradoxes. In any case, it is already paradoxical for today's people that if you go back to the second, third, fourth cultural period, it is as if, in those days, people who had really found their way to humanity were, to put it trivially, on familiar terms with the angels, archangels and archai, had dealings with them. Yes, for someone who does not live to be older than twenty-eight years today, it is of course a crazy thought to claim that people once not only made agreements among themselves, but they communicated with angels, with archangels and with archai, as we communicate with each other today on the physical plane. That this view prevails and the other view seems a madness is only because people have forgotten old knowledge. In Plato you find a remarkable and very important passage, that is, during the period in which humanity offered man twenty-eight to thirty-five years. Plato said: Before the spiritual man sank into sensuality and lost his wings, he lived among the gods in the rational spiritual world, where everything is true and pure. And by this Plato means not only the life before birth, but the life in ancient times, when people still gained their knowledge from their dealings with the gods themselves. — I also hinted at this in the mystery play where an old initiate speaks of the old teachers who draw their knowledge from their dealings with the gods, that is, with the spirits of the higher hierarchies.

But certain things are connected with the development of humanity which, precisely because that is the case, are no longer understood at all. One has strange experiences.

Allow me to cite an experience that is both gratifying and disappointing. A strange word, isn't it, but it is true. It is gratifying because I have to mention the name of a man who was very kind to my writing 'Thoughts During the Time of War', from the northern countries, a person who likes to find his way into the world as far as he can, Kjellén, the state researcher, who is now in Uppsala. I do not want to attack or criticize the man, on the contrary, I have chosen this example because Kjellén is one of our friends. He has recently written an interesting book, 'The State as a Form of Life', in which he attempts to present a deeper understanding of the state. Yes, Kjellén is trying to gain a view of how the state should be an organism. For those who now see through these things and who, from the study of spiritual science, know how political science, if it existed today, should be structured in order to be fruitful in practical state life, reading Kjellén's book, even though one likes the author very much, is almost torture, a real torture. Why? Well, you see, Kjellén does not go any further than to ask: If one now regards the state as a whole organism, then man lives within the state. What then is the human being? It suggests itself: a cell! Thus, for Kjellén, the human being is a cell of the state organism. Kjellén builds much of his book “The State as a Form of Life” on this idea. The human being is a cell, as we have cells within us, and the state is the whole organism, which organizes itself through its various cells.

You see, if you just go out on comparisons – and that's all it is – then you can actually compare everything with everything. You can actually logically support any thought, because if you don't draw any consequences, you can compare an organism with a pocket knife. But it all depends on having a sense of penetrating reality. But if you look at Kjellen's book in particular, you immediately come across some very strange dead ends. In an organism, the cells are next to each other, one adjoins the other, and the fact that they adjoin each other and have the effect that comes from it makes the organism an organism. This can no longer be applied to the interaction of people in the so-called state organism. In short, if you want to remain abstractly logical, you can come up with any number of clever thoughts about it, write a rather thick book about it, and then indulge in the idea that it is also practical. But if you have a sense of reality, then the thought must be developed further. It must really be sunk into reality; that is the first step to understanding. I recommend that you read the book; it is a representative book of the present time. Buy it and read it and feel that agony of which I have spoken. It comes with the fact that the thought pops out: What can be compared to the organism if one wants to apply the thought of the organism to the social life of humanity? - Only the life of humanity on the whole earth. And the individual states can only be compared to cells.

The life of humanity on the whole earth may be called an organism, and the individual states may be called cells, but not a state as an organism and the individual human being as a cell. But in this way the whole thing is only compared to a plant, to the life of the state. Never with anything other than a plant organism. And if one wants to retain the concept of an organism, then one would have to take the organism and the human being would have to stand out. For the human being develops beyond all state life. He cannot be absorbed, like the cell in the individual organism, into this state life, but must stand out. That is to say, there must be spheres in the evolution of mankind that cannot be included in the state. It will be seen that man must reach out into a spiritual realm, that man can only reach into the state life through his lower anchorage, but upwards into the spiritual world. And here it is interesting how some researchers are suddenly confronted with the fact that people in ancient times, when the mysteries still existed, knew something about them. And Kjellen himself points to an interesting book, a book written fifty years ago by Fustel de Coulanges: 'La Cit& antique'. And he comes to the strange, incomprehensible to both the author Fustel de Coulanges and Kjellén: What was the old state? What was that? — Coulanges comes to say to himself: Yes, the old states were all based on worship. Why? The state was a form of worship because it was still felt that man had to reach up into the spiritual world. Someone could only set the tone in the state if he was initiated into the mysteries and received instructions about the social structure from the mysteries. It was still like that in the third and fourth periods. People come to it through external research, but they cannot do anything with it, even though they can even read about it in history.

It is tremendously tragic to read the last page of Kjellén's book “The State as a Form of Life” and see that he now wants to construct something that is political science, but is completely, completely discouraged by the fact that What are we to do with the cell? If one wanted to realize Kjellen's idea, one could actually only decapitate people, because they cannot, with their heads, belong to such a state, which would be constructed as Kjellen's science constructs it, since they must extend beyond the state with their spirituality.

You see, when you look more deeply at life, you come to very strange things. And that is why all that is still called political science today does not yet know what it wants at all. Nowhere is there a real political science by today's standards. All we have is mere talk. For a real political science will only be possible when we are once more oriented towards the way in which man is connected with the spiritual world, when we once more know how much we can organize in our earthly life together and how much must freely transcend the organization. These things must be brought up from certain depths. Here you feel, my dear friends, how things become tragic. Humanity must bear within itself the laws of its development, must have some sense of these laws of development.

In particular – please forgive me for mentioning particulars at the end – one comes up against terrible obstacles when one feels it as a necessity of life to think in a real way. To think in a real way also means to think spiritually, because if one does not think spiritually, one does not think in a real way, but rather one thinks an essence-less abstraction. If you have developed the habit of thinking in real terms, you will often come up against obstacles today. Please forgive me for choosing an obvious example that seems trivial.

For example, I can say that nothing impresses me less than someone coming today within the German-speaking world and writing so-called beautiful verses, perfectly beautiful verses, as most people still like them. Something that has undergone such a development as the German language, and has such developmental possibilities ahead of it as the German language, is where so-called beautiful verses today practically write themselves, especially in the immature youth up to the age of twenty-eight. If one solves artistic verse problems, then one does not arrive at what people today often consider beautiful verses, because these actually belong to what one enjoys when one transports oneself into earlier times. Therefore, many people today are quite successful at making beautiful verses, but the point is to advance in development. It may often happen that someone writes less beautiful verses but tries to create a new art form from an elementary point of view. Naturally many people will think it dreadful when someone attempts to create a new art form that is perhaps still very imperfect in relation to what it should become. You see, I would now like to say something personal. I will not speak of my opinion of the verses in which Mr. von Bernus expounded anthroposophical thoughts in Das Reich. But you can all be quite certain that, however little any one of you may have liked the verses, Mr. von Bernus could have produced verses like them off his cuff if he had wanted to write them. Things are not so simple after all. And today, when there is so much malicious disparaging and defaming of what we want, this magazine, 'Das Reich', emerged with the best of intentions, and it should have been supported precisely because of this very best intention, regardless of one's attitude towards the individual issue. Therefore it was hard for me to hear that Mr. von Bernus Schocke had received letters from our circle of members which slandered what was written in the journal. One would have had much more opportunity to look at what was directly aimed at destroying our movement. And so it happens that someone who has set out to tell untruths about everything in our movement can claim: “The Reich”, which is under the sign of Steiner.” Now, I have no more connection with this journal than I could possibly have with any other; I did not found it, it is the work of Mr. von Bernus, it is not connected with my personality. I write articles for this journal and am not responsible for anything. But anyone who uses the defamatory expression in a hurtful manner in one direction or the other can also know that - in such a case it is a defamatory expression - “this magazine serves Steiner's purposes”. On the contrary, one should be able to be pleased when something comes from a completely outside source. But so far we have often experienced that precisely those who wanted to support our cause were thrown stones in the way by our members, but that it was advised against to support our cause in good will and in a bold way, while one did not care about all the defamation that has happened on the whole.

There would be much more to say. I wanted to mention this because I really want to emphasize that it never occurred to me to talk about this or that in the “Reich” in any other way than to discuss it, that is, to see if perhaps behind the seemingly imperfect there is a striving for development , and I really had no desire to look at what many have looked at, those who have felt called to do so, which would be nonsense anyway, even if it were not distasteful to send their judgment in letters to the poet. That is the most distasteful and harmful way. For one need not approach personally with a defamatory letter the one who has endeavored to write about the matter. Even if the letter were justified, he could not understand it, he lives inside the matter. One may say one's opinion to all the others, only do not send it to the poet's house.

Now, my dear friends, all these things that are said only ever hit one side, the side of a few. But it is the case that, in society, the innocent are imprisoned with the guilty and now have to atone for them. That is what is more painful to me than to those who suffer from today's measures.

But there is one more thing I would like to add: anyone in society who merely communicates the one measure, that I will no longer discuss personal matters in private conversations in the future, would only say one-sided things. The whole thing is part of it: I expressly release everyone from the promise, insofar as they themselves want it, to keep secret something that has been said in private conversations. That is part of it, and that is the important thing. During the defamation campaign, believe it or not, these measures are so necessary that no exceptions can be made. But no one should lose anything. What can be done esoterically will also be possible when it has to be done in full public view. And I shall find ways and means, although I cannot and must not make exceptions in private conversations, so that everyone will be able to satisfy their esoteric needs in the future as well. Please be patient for a short time. Even without private conversations, there will be ways and means to ensure that everything that can legitimately be demanded for esoteric life is satisfied, without the damage that has been caused to our society by the defamation of private conversations.

And now I would like to say that I would like to bring up something that is deeply connected to what can lead us to an understanding of our difficult present, but that I am truly not finished with what I wanted to say to you during this stay. Therefore, for those who want to come, I will speak here again on Tuesday evening.

In today's additional consideration of the discussions that I was able to give here in Stuttgart this time, I will deal with adding a few things to what has already been said, in order to round it off, so to speak.

To begin with, it will be best if I pick up from where I left off in yesterday's public lecture. There we saw how the human soul, in its threefold nature, has relationships with the bodily and the spiritual. And we emphasized in particular that the feeling element of the soul has relationships with the body towards the respiratory life, that, so to speak, what is breathing in the body, and in a comprehensive sense, with all its ramifications and ramifications, is the tool for the emotional life. On the other hand, we have been able to show that the life of feeling has a special relationship to everything that is accessible to inspiration in the spiritual world. But what is accessible to inspiration in the spiritual world is also, at the same time, everything that is contained in the world to which we belong with that part of our being that passes through birth and death, the world that we live through between death and a new birth, the world in which we naturally also live between birth and death. This world is hidden by sense perception and ordinary thinking, that is, by the life of the body. So that what corresponds to breathing and feeling actually points us to the great, all-encompassing world into which we ascend when we pass through the gate of death, the world to which we belong when we no longer use the tool of our bodily life. The tool of our bodily life, so to speak, fetters us to earthly existence. From various lectures given over many years and recorded in the cycles, you know that when the soul has passed through the gate of death, it is not tied to earthly life, but rises into the cosmos to live in the spiritual worlds of that cosmos, in that which can be called the spiritual world. Is it not to be expected that precisely the emotional life, which corresponds bodily to breathing, spiritually to the inspired world, the emotional life with the breathing life, is in a much, much more comprehensive relationship to the cosmos, to the great world, to the macrocosm than our narrowly limited perception and imagination? What do we perceive in the end? We perceive a very small part of the world; a small part of the world plays into our physical existence between birth and death through our eyes and ears. Even if we are people who enjoy looking around and perceiving everything through our senses and then processing it in our imaginations, it is still a small part of the world that plays into our existence.

But what happens when we turn from the life of the nerves, to which the life of thinking belongs, to the life of breathing, to which the life of feeling belongs? A concept that is capable of elevating our feelings can be given to us by what can approach our soul in the following way: You all know that the sun rises at a certain point in spring. At the beginning of spring, on March 21, the sun rises in the morning at a certain point. But this point is not the same at all times, you know that. In ancient times, the sun rose at the beginning of spring in the constellation of Taurus, then in the constellation of Aries; the vernal point thus moves on and has now entered the constellation of Pisces. If you turn to what I mean now, you are therefore looking at the progression of the vernal point through the zodiac. The vernal point itself moves on in the zodiac. When a point in a circle moves on, it must of course arrive at the same point again after a certain time. Now, ordinary astronomy is familiar with this progression of the vernal point and its return to the same point in the zodiac. That is to say, if in a particular year of the past the vernal point was in Aries, the next year it will be a little further along, and so on, and then it will have moved out into Pisces and so on, and after a certain time it will be back in Aries again. The time it takes the vernal point to move through the entire zodiac is approximately 25,900 years, about 26,000 years. This number of 26,000 years expresses a measure of the outer cosmos: the measure by which the vernal point progresses. In this number, we have, so to speak, the means by which the course of the sun is measured in the cosmos. We could say, approximately. If we hold on to this number, we can add another consideration, which we now want to make.

A person breathes in and out, taking a certain number of breaths in one minute. We do not take the same number of breaths at every age between birth and death, but there is a certain average number of breaths per minute that a man of average strength can take. That is eighteen breaths in one minute. Now let's calculate how many breaths a person takes in the course of a twenty-four-hour day. First, we have to multiply the number of breaths taken in one minute by sixty, which gives us one thousand and eighty. Then we multiply that by twenty-four, which gives us the number of breaths a person takes in one day, including night and day: 25,920 breaths. It is remarkable that if we count the breaths of a person over the course of a twenty-four hour day, we get the same number as when we calculate the number of years that result from the advance of the sun in the great cosmos. The number of years that the equinox advances in fits and starts corresponds to the number of times that a person breathes in one day. The same number! Just think how wonderfully true that biblical saying is: that the wisdom of the world has ordered everything according to measure and number. — A number that is inscribed in the cosmos is reflected in our twenty-four-hour breathing. We can therefore also take this number into consideration, and we will find that human breathing is related to the great world in the way that was revealed yesterday by spiritual science.

But now, in a sense, we are again looking at something that is also a breathing, because breathing is nothing more than a special case of the general world rhythm. The essential thing in what was meant by breathing yesterday is the rhythmic movement, the rhythm. Let us look at something that is quite similar to breathing, another rhythmic movement that we know from our spiritual scientific considerations. When we fall asleep, our ego and our astral body leave our physical body and ether body; when we wake up again, our ego and our astral body enter our physical body and ether body. I have often compared the peculiar behavior of the ego and the astral body, this going out and coming in into the physical and ether bodies, with breathing out and breathing in. Just as we breathe in and out the air in an eighteenth of a minute, so, in the course of twenty-four hours, we breathe in our ego and our astral body, as it were, by waking up, by falling asleep; by waking up again, we breathe them in again, and by falling asleep again, we breathe them out. It is only a more comprehensive breathing out and breathing in of our ego and astral body in the course of the twenty-four hours of an ordinary astronomical day. How very remarkable, something is breathing! Let us first disregard what is breathing. There is a definite rhythm, which represents a kind of slow breathing, with each breath lasting twenty-four hours. Now, you know that the Bible speaks of the patriarchal age, of seventy, seventy-one years. Of course, this does not mean that this is something different from the average age. Some people die very young, some live to be a hundred, even over a hundred years old, but the patriarchal age is meant to be something average. So that when we mean something average in terms of human age, we can speak of seventy to one hundred and one years. Let's work out how many days that is. If we calculate that, we would find out how many such great breaths we take in an earthly life, where we exhale and inhale the ego and the astral body over the course of twenty-four hours. Let's calculate that: we take about three hundred and sixty-five such breaths in a year, as many as there are days in a year. So in seventy years it is seventy times as much: that would be 25,550. But let us assume that we are calculating for seventy-one years, and then we come a little closer: that makes 25,915. So a person only needs to live a little over seventy-one years to reach 25,920 such breaths. This means that if a person lives to be a little over seventy-one years old, he has breathed his I and his astral body in and out 25,920 times; that is, as often as a person breathes in and out during the day. Think about it: the same number again!

So you see that we can regard human life as a day, and the individual day that we live through as a breath: then our seventy-one to seventy-two year life is given by the number that is also the number of the advance of the vernal point, which is the number of breaths in one day. Our life is one great day, and the great Being at whose center we can imagine the Earth breathes out and in the I and astral body as often as we go out and in with our single breath. So our single life on Earth would be one day, one day of something. What is it a day of? If you multiply seventy-one by three hundred and sixty-five, you naturally get the year for the day of seventy-one years. If you count seventy-one years as one day and ask: What is one year of this day, it is three hundred and sixty-five times as much. But that is 25,920 years. That means, if we count our single life on earth with its 25,920 breaths, which are waking and sleeping, as one day, count a human life as one day, and see what year corresponds to this one human life with its 25,920 breaths: it is the orbit of the vernal point, 25,920 years! We get a wonderful numerical rhythm.

That is why I said: we get an idea that must be uplifting for our feelings, because we can feel that we are placed in the macrocosm through measure and number. Numbers reveal to us that which is true for us in the realization that what belongs to breathing, and therefore to the emotional life, is the inspiring world, the great world to which we belong not only between birth and death, but also in the time between death and a new birth and in repeated earthly lives. We are, as it were, in the bosom of the rhythm of our entire solar system, breathing in our individual breathing movements the great macrocosmic rhythm of our entire solar system. This is a thought that places us with certainty in the midst of the great life of our solar universe. In the course of time, people will have to make many more similar observations, and then they will be convinced that in this way they will again come to spirit-filled perceptions about the relationship between man and the universe. We need spirit-filled perceptions for our age and for the following ages in the sense that they are stimuli for our inner life, as was explained here the day before yesterday. In ancient times, it was the case that man's enlightenment came, so to speak, from outside. Today, this has been lost through the nature of the declining ages of humanity. We are now in an age in which, if humanity is not to descend into decadence, a development of the human soul from within must begin in an energetic way. And only he understands what our time needs who, as a necessity of earthly development, understands that spiritual life must take hold of the innermost part of the human soul from the fifth post-Atlantic period in which we live, into the time to which we are to develop further. What spiritual science says about this is not said out of some arbitrary idea or out of an agitative sentiment, but it is said out of the realization of the necessity of human development.

Now today we are once again looking at this human development from a slightly different point of view. Let us go back to the first post-Atlantic age, that is, the age immediately following the great Atlantic catastrophe. The day before yesterday, after having done so from a different point of view on several occasions, we emphasized how, in this first post-Atlantean age, man was still related to that series of beings that we call archai or spirits of personality in the hierarchies. Spiritual life was still revealed in these ancient times of humanity because the age of life in those days was such that we can compare it to the present age between the fifty-sixth and forty-eighth year, as I explained the day before yesterday. Man had, so to speak, instruction from spiritual beings. How did these spiritual beings come to man? In those days, man did not look at nature in the same way as he does today. For man today, nature is a kind of mechanical order. Man today regards abstract, almost mathematical laws of nature as his ideal, an abstract order. Take the images that are spread out around you when you go out into nature. Compare what is out there with what is written in botanical and zoological textbooks about plants and animals. Compare these distorted, abstract ideas with life, and you can say: What is written in these books of botany and zoology is what is revealed to the human spirit today. Such botany and zoology, of which today's humanity is so tremendously proud, did not exist in that age. If we compare what modern botany, zoology and biology have to say about nature with the knowledge of nature that arose from the ancient way of knowing, we arrive at a different view. There was no botany or zoology of that kind in those days, but there was something else, something that is still very difficult for modern humanity to understand. It came from nature itself, and I would like to call what came out of nature: the light-filled, formed word. Just as we see nature today through our senses and minds, they did not see it that way, but nature sent them figures of light, and these figures of light also sounded, said something, expressed themselves about what they are. And every person could experience this atavistic clairvoyance in certain states of consciousness, whereby the light-filled, formed word came to meet him from nature; one could also say words, because a wealth of such figures came, speaking out of nature. The human being knew: You too belong to this world from which these words full of light come forth. You too belong there. But now you are here in nature, surrounded by minerals, plants and animals. You are in nature because you have an outer physical body; through this you belong to this nature. But nature lets the light-filled word sprout forth: you belong to it in your soul's nature just as your physical body belongs to the outer mineral, plant, and animal world. You were in this world of the light-filled, light-shaped word before your birth or conception, and you will be in it after your death. You will live in it again.

In the first post-Atlantean period, one could still see and feel an echo of the world in which one lives between death and a new birth by observing nature in certain states of consciousness. In the second post-Atlantean period, things were already somewhat different. The word was lost for these atavistic states. The figures no longer spoke themselves, but they were still there, light-filled figures were still there, only they had become mute. That which lay outwardly before the senses was felt as the darkness in this light-filled formation within, and one's own body was felt as a piece of the darkness. So that one could say: light and darkness! One's own body is ruled by darkness. By coming out of the light and going into darkness, he enters into earthly life through birth or conception; by going through the gate of death, he passes through the dark world back into the light. In the world there is a struggle between light and darkness, between Ormuzd and Ahriman. Thus Zarathustra, who was the teacher of this second post-Atlantean cultural epoch, spoke to his disciples. One does not understand what Zarathustrism means with its Ormuzd and Ahriman teachings if one does not relate it to the way people viewed the world at that time.

The situation had changed again in the third post-Atlantic period. If you look at the outward appearance, the light-filled figures had gradually disappeared in the third post-Atlantic period. But people still had the power to put themselves into an intermediate state between sleeping and waking, just as we put ourselves to sleep today. They only had to make a little effort. When sleeping, one does not need to make an effort, but in this different state, one had to make some effort. But if one made an effort, one could conjure up such a world of light around oneself, which now came from within and was similar to that which used to come from nature, from outside. So what was the actual progression from the second post-Atlantean cultural period to the third, the Egyptian-Chaldean-Babylonian period? What was the transition like? Well, in the second, in the Persian cultural period, people still saw the figures of light when they looked outwards and could say to themselves: Before my soul went through conception, it belonged to this world of light figures. In the third cultural period, this world of light no longer shone from the outside in, but the human being could, as it were, squeeze it out of himself; then he had conjured up out of his soul and in front of his soul what was there in the spiritual world before his birth or conception and what will be there in the spiritual world after his death. So that we can say: the third post-Atlantean period had the world of light as a soul experience. People had the world of light as a soul experience, so to a certain extent man had been pushed back from the external world more to his inner being. It was no longer the natural way for man to look at the outer world and see the world of light, that is, to see the spiritual world around him. Therefore, it had become necessary during this time to initiate a small circle of people in the manner of the Mysteries, so that they would be able to see the outer world of light again and bear witness to the fact that what was brought up from the depths of the soul was truly the same as that which lived in the spiritual realm.

Now came the fourth post-Atlantean period, the Greco-Latin one. In this fourth period, no more light came up when man put himself in a special state, as in the third period. The light no longer came, nor did that come up from the depths of the human being that would have been an echo of the soul's life before conception and after death. But there was still a certainty that the human being's inner being is filled with soul. This certainty came up. One still sensed something of what one had seen earlier when one inwardly brought the soul to see. One no longer saw the light, but one still felt the warmth of the light. That was the case in the Greco-Latin period. There we must say: the world of light was no longer experienced inwardly as a soul experience, but the soul itself was experienced as a soul experience.

But naturally this had to become weaker and weaker in the course of time. And how is the whole relationship expressed at all? It was expressed in the following way. We will have to look particularly at the Greeks if we want to understand the matter: the Greeks had, like the average person today, the consciousness of their body. But through what I have described, they also had the consciousness: the soul pervades the body. They felt the soul as invigorating, the body as it lives through. This feeling, which the Greeks still had, has been lost. The fact that history says nothing about the fact that this feeling has been lost today is only because we live in the age of materialism. No one really understands Homer, no one understands Sophocles or Aeschylus, if they do not read them with the feeling that the Greeks had a different spiritual experience than that of today's people. If one were to read Aeschylus with this feeling, one would provide different translations than those that are provided today and sometimes admired, and which, especially in the most intimate things, truly do not resemble Aeschylus. But the fact that it was so had a very definite consequence for the Greeks, namely that they felt the invigorating soul element in their bodies during the time between birth and death, and thus came to another realization: that body and soul actually belong together very intimately. Never in the development of humanity has this realization been as strong as in the Greek era. For in earlier epochs, which preceded the time of the Greeks, people actually always had the feeling that the soul belongs to the world of light, the world of the word, the world of the Logos, in which the human being lives before birth and after death. Now, in the materialistic age, it is the case that the human being no longer feels the soul at all. In Greek times, and to a lesser extent in Roman times, there was a sense of the intimate connection between body and soul. The Greeks regarded the body as the external form for the soul. Growth and decay of the body appeared to the Greeks as an expression of the growth and decay of the soul. The Greek loved the body as much as he loved the soul. This feeling, as it existed in the Greek, was not present in the same way in the past – as I have just explained – and is not present again today. But the consequence of this was the feeling that is so deeply expressed in the words put into the mouth of Achilles: “Better a beggar in the upper world than a king in the realm of shadows.” The Greeks had to pay for the beautiful harmony they felt between body and soul with the fact that, if they were not members of the mysteries, any notion of how the soul fares in the spiritual world after death had completely disappeared. Now, the remarkable thing is that the great Greek philosopher Aristotle, who was a great thinker but not initiated into the mysteries, spoke in a grandiose way about the experience of the soul after death, as one could speak in those days if one was able to envision the intimate harmony between body and soul in the way of the Greek age.

And when in the Middle Ages, in the so-called scholastic philosophy, Aristotle was revived, the scholastics said: In philosophy, one must think about the soul as Aristotle thought. If one wants to know more about it, it can only come from faith. With mere human research, one cannot go further than Aristotle. — How far did Aristotle go, he who is so very much the philosophical expression of the Greek way of looking at body and soul? He really did arrive at what can be so beautifully expressed in the words of the recently deceased masterly Aristotle scholar Franz Brentano, who says: If a person has lost a limb, he can no longer make use of that limb; he is, as it were, no longer a whole person. If he has lost two limbs, he is even less of a whole person. If he has now lost his entire body – so says Aristotle and with him Franz Brentano – and is still a soul after death, which Aristotle does not deny, then he is in a state of incompleteness compared to the state in which he is between birth and death. He is not a complete human being. And that is indeed the true doctrine of immortality of Aristotle, the greatest thinker of the Greek world, that man is only here between birth and death a complete, a perfect human being. If he goes through the gate of death, he is only a piece of man; he is indeed immortal, but at the expense of no longer being a whole human being. This is indeed the price that Hellenism had to pay for its beauty and harmony, that it came to the age of man – you know, compared to the human age – where one could indeed sense the soul from within, but where one could not yet see the life of the soul in the spiritual world, where one had to say of the soul: it is no longer a complete human being after death. Only those who were initiated into the mysteries, that is, those who were endowed with powers of knowledge that went beyond the normal, were revealed what the soul experiences between death and a new birth. That is the great difference between Plato and Aristotle, that Plato was initiated into the mysteries and Aristotle was not. Therefore, Plato must be understood in a completely different sense than Aristotle, who came to the “Chimborasso of thought” but could not penetrate to the secrets of the spiritual world.

That is why those who had power in this age strove for something different from what one can achieve in normal human life. Who were the men who had the power, who were able to develop this power? Certainly, there was a great, significant world of initiation, spread by the mysteries here and there, filling the then cultural world; but these mysteries gave people that which Plato said lifted people above the mud of transience. Those who had power in this fourth post-Atlantean period were primarily searching for something in the soul that would enable them to participate in the spiritual world. According to the general karma of humanity, one normally had to wait until one was introduced to the mysteries in the sense of the initiation principle of that time. In Greece this was common practice. The Roman Caesars did not need that. The Roman Caesars, who gradually rose to dominate the world at that time, were able to use their power to be initiated into the mysteries.

And so we see that from the time of Augustus onwards, the Roman Caesars sought initiation simply through their power. They forced one priesthood or another to initiate them into the mysteries. So that in this fourth period a peculiar phenomenon can be observed: on the one hand we have the mystery principle, the mystery knowledge that was still there, but which gradually disappeared, gradually declined I have often described why this had to happen: because the Mystery of Golgotha took its place. On the other hand, the priests were forced to reveal their secrets to the Roman Caesars. Augustus was the first emperor to be initiated in the fourth post-Atlantic period; but his successors were also such initiates. They differed in their nature from the other initiates, who were initiated into the mysteries on the basis of moral qualities, namely, of moral development. The Roman Caesars were initiated on the basis of their power, in that they were able to force the priesthood to reveal their secrets to them. And so we see that even a successor of Augustus like Caligula was an initiate. But that is why a person like Caligula was familiar with the secrets of the spiritual universe. He was familiar with the fact that the impulses of this spiritual universe are revived in the soul, that the human ego is divine within the divine. That which was a sacred truth of humility for the initiated priests became a symbol of external world power for the Caesars. For what did a Caligula know? The others stared at the mythological figures of the gods that had come down to them from ancient times; they worshiped them. An initiate like Caligula knew what these gods meant. Above all, he knew that man belongs to the same world as his innermost being. From experience, Caligula knew that he belonged to the same world as those beings who have their images in these gods: Bacchus, Hercules, Mercury, Apollo, Zeus. Caligula knew the secret of how he could commune with the gods of the lunar world in a sleep-like state. And it is not mere myth, but absolutely true, when it is said of Caligula that he was said to have associated in his sleep – but it is meant in another state of consciousness – with Luna, the moon goddess, and to have drawn from it nourishment for his sense of power. The world lives in me – he said to himself – for I am in it. By looking up at the gods, he saw himself as a god among gods. And the initiated Roman emperors meant it when they said that. The initiated priest knew how to enter the dwelling of the gods, and so the Roman Caesar forced himself into communion with the gods. “My brother Jupiter,” ‘My brother Zeus’: these were terms that Caligula in particular used again and again. And it was Caligula who once asked a tragedian which of them was greater, Jupiter or he, Caligula. And when the tragedian refused to answer that Caligula was greater than Jupiter, he had him flogged. These are not myths, these are historical facts. Hence the processions in which Caligula appeared before the people as Bacchus with 'thyrsus and ephhebe wreath', because he was aware that he could transform himself into those figures he knew as images of the gods. As Hercules he appeared with the club and lion skin, as Mercury with the Hermes wand, as Apollo with the corona and surrounded by choirs. Thus he appeared in order to instill in his people the awareness that he belonged to the gods and not to men. Such was the situation in those times, in which, one might say, the less favorable image of what was great in the Greek world was reflected in the Roman world. Of course, no one saw this better than a Caligula or other uninitiated emperors such as Commodus and others. Caligula once heard that a court case had taken place in which a judge sentenced a defendant to death. And when the matter was reported to him, since it was a special case, he said: “The judge could just as well have been sentenced to death, because he is worth just as much as the other.” This was how he viewed the moral state of his time. In Romanism, the opposite of Greek culture really appears. We no longer have any conception of the inner constitution of the Romans of the time of Caesar. But we must form a conception of it, for it is one of the roots from which our new, our fifth cultural epoch developed in the course of time.

Nero, too, was such an initiate, an initiated emperor. And precisely because of that, Nero was able to see something very special. Those who were initiated into the mysteries at that time knew that evolution had gone downhill to a certain point. It must go up again, but it must also become more spiritualized. That is really what is meant by the “Parousia,” by the new age, of which Christ Jesus also speaks.

If you compare what is alive in all these ancient cultural epochs up to the Greeks with later times, you will find that in these ancient cultural epochs, the soul-spiritual still reveals itself in a certain way through the physical. Then it ceases; it no longer reveals itself, and must now be sought through other means. If man wants to seek the spiritual and soul through what he can see with his eyes and hear with his ears, he can no longer find it. The Kingdoms of Heaven were once revealed through the bodies, but now they must arise in the spirit. The Kingdoms of Heaven must come near. This is the prophecy of John the Baptist. This is also what Christ Jesus meant by the Parousia. Only, in a certain sense, the theologians still stand to this day on the peculiar point of view that they believe that Christ meant by the Parousia that the earth must physically change. Blavatsky also criticizes the saying of Christ Jesus about the Parousia, the coming of the Kingdoms of Heaven, saying: “It was foretold that the Kingdoms of Heaven would come upon the Earth, but the grain has not improved; the grapes are no richer than before; no Heavens have come upon the Earth. All the people who speak in this way do not understand what is meant. What Christ Jesus meant, what John meant, had already come to pass: the Kingdom of Heaven had already descended upon the earth, in that the Christ had embodied Himself in Jesus of Nazareth. The event is to be understood as a spiritual one.

But an initiate like Nero, who knew this also from the mysteries, rebelled against it. He actually came to the delusion that he said to himself: Well, the world is in decline, so it shall perish! — And that is actually the psychological reason why Nero had Rome set on fire — which he really did — because he at least wanted to have the spectacle of the firebrand coming from there to burn the whole world. For he no longer thought much of this world. He did not want to admit the renewal that came through the mystery of Golgotha. He was a madman, but he was also a genius. Through his power, he had forced his initiation, so all his ideas were great, greater than those of others who did not have this prerequisite. In a sense, therefore, Nero was the first psychoanalyst, but a generous one, not a psychoanalyst like those who are called Freud or otherwise. For Nero idolized the physical, in that he, like the psychoanalyst, wanted to bring up what was spiritual and mental from the subconscious. Today's psychoanalyst says: What is down there in the soul? Disappointments, all kinds of wasted lives and so on, and then he says: the animalistic, basic sludge of the soul is down there, there is not much beauty down there. When you hear a psychoanalyst today, it is as if a person is describing a field that has just been fertilized and then cultivated with the seeds for the near future, but the person only sees the fertilizer, the manure. So the psychoanalyst sees only what is really dung in the soul, comparatively speaking, of course. He does not see the eternal in the soul, that which goes from life to life. This is why psychoanalysis is so dangerous: although it goes down to the subconscious, instead of the soul-spiritual essence of the soul, it sees the animalistic mud, as if one does not see the germinating seed but only the dung. Nero was a great psychoanalyst when he said: There is absolutely nothing in man but the animalistic primeval mud; everything else is mere appearance. It used to be different when people were still close to the divine, but now man consists only of this animalistic primeval mud; there is not even the slightest part that is chaste; everything in man is dissolute – so said Nero. One can see from this, one feels especially with those who had forced their way into initiation in this way, the materialization of the world. In these circles, the old, spiritual principle of initiation was generally translated into the material. When Commodus, who had made himself not only an initiate but also an initiator, wanted to give a symbolic blow to someone whom he himself had to initiate, he killed him on the spot. Instead of delivering him to spiritual death, that is to say, to raising him, he killed him! Thus Commodus, the initiator. This is an historical fact.

What occurred during this fourth period is the Mystery of Golgotha. And since the spiritual can no longer come from the external and material, the spiritual must be conquered again. The ascent within has received an impulse through the Mystery of Golgotha. But we live in the fifth period, where this conquest has not yet flourished, where precisely those forces that emerged so grotesquely in Roman times are still strong in people and fight against the impulse of ascent that was brought by the Mystery of Golgotha. And so it is understandable that in this fifth post-Atlantic period, the age of materialism in the way of thinking and feeling has mainly emerged.

The Mystery of Golgotha has already brought an impulse so that the great corruption of the Romans has somewhat diminished, but man has not yet brought it about that the spiritual-soul in his soul also naturally shines forth again. For this, further impulses are needed; for this, a more intensive, a more thorough becoming acquainted with the Christ Impulse is needed. This must become more and more familiar. And so, in the fifth cultural period, the normal human being no longer encounters the soul when they experience themselves. The sense of the soul, the inner experience of the soul, has disappeared for the normal human being. The human being experiences themselves in the experience of the body; they experience themselves as a body, as a natural body.

Self-awareness of the body! And that is why the soul has disappeared from science in particular, and is still disappearing more and more. This soul must be conquered again from within. The fifth post-Atlantic cultural period, which began around 1413-1415, is only just beginning. Humanity will have to develop further in it in such a way that the spiritual is truly conquered more and more within. But this is initially making itself felt in the realm of the soul through a peculiar phenomenon: the phenomenon that something in man himself is appearing materially that was not so material before: namely, thinking itself. Such thinking, as we have it in the fifth period, would have been impossible for the Greeks, and even more so for the Egyptians, Chaldeans or the ancient Persians. Behind the Greeks, imaginative ideas still existed to a certain extent, and even more so in older times; and anyone who can really read Aristotle will notice effective imaginations even in the dry Aristotle, because thinking was still more consciously taking place in the etheric body. Now thinking is completely drawn into the physical body, has become completely brain thinking, and then it takes on the abstract character of which our time is so proud. Thinking that becomes completely abstract is thinking that is really bound to matter, to the matter of the brain. And this thinking, it shows itself precisely in the most epoch-making impulses, which in turn must be deepened, otherwise thinking becomes more and more materialistic and materialistic. And as thinking becomes more and more materialistic, life must also become more and more materialistic. Fundamental ideas - that is the characteristic of our present fifth epoch, which should work as impulses, they only work as abstract ideas.

And there was a time when abstraction as a principle of life had reached its zenith. Everything is necessary – understand me correctly – I do not want to criticize, I am not speaking from the point of view of sympathy and antipathy, I am characterizing as one does scientifically. I do not want to criticize – nobody should think that – the fact that there was an epoch in which abstract world ideas celebrated their greatest triumph. That epoch was when three ideas were expressed in the most extreme abstraction: liberty, equality, fraternity. They were expressed in the most extreme abstraction. This is not said from a conservative or reactionary point of view, but to characterize the development of humanity. At the end of the 18th century, everything calls for freedom, equality, fraternity, not from the soul, but from the thinking brain. And this developed in the 19th century in such a way that we still feel it reverberating everywhere like a habit today. In the course of the nineteenth century, people became terribly accustomed to the abstraction of thinking and are content in the abstractness of thinking because it makes them feel so clever. They believe that in thinking they have truth and feel no need to immerse their thinking in reality. This must be learned again, to immerse oneself in reality; otherwise it remains with the declamation of abstract ideas that have no value for life.

This is the great disease of our time, the declaiming of abstract ideas that have no value for life. If someone says today that a time must come when the world offers the path to success to the hardworking, when the hardworking are given the right place, well, what could be better than this idea! Is it not a wonderful ideal: a free path for the brave! — Sometimes, in today's materialistic times, when one expresses such an ideal, one feels as if one were carrying the whole future in one's breast. But what use is such an abstract ideal if it means that one considers one's son-in-law or one's nephew to be the most capable? What matters is not that we recognize, express and proclaim an abstract ideal, but that we are able to immerse our souls in reality, to see through reality in its essence, to recognize, penetrate, experience and work with reality. Expressing beautiful ideas and enjoying expressing beautiful ideas will increasingly prove harmful. What must enter into our soul is love for reality, knowledge, and adaptation to reality. But this can only come about when people learn to recognize the whole of reality, for the reality of the senses is only the outer shell of reality. If someone who sees a horseshoe-shaped magnet says, “That's the best way to shoe a horse's hoof,” does he have the whole of reality? No, only when he recognizes that there is magnetism in the horseshoe does he have the whole reality. But just as the person who knows nothing else to do with a magnet but to shoe a horse acts, so too is the person who wants to found an external natural science or political science, under the assumption that everything is only the visible world and can be grasped with concepts borrowed from the visible world. This is precisely the extreme abstraction, the harmfulness of abstract ideals. And one does not recognize this harmfulness because the ideals are true, because they are also good, but they are ineffective. They only serve human epistemological egoism, which feels lust in living in such ideals. But no world is ruled by that. At best, it governs a world as it has become in the first half of the 20th century.

One must surrender oneself to such feelings if one wants to understand our time more deeply. The soul life must come alive in the human being, which has emerged so gradually, as I have described, from our environment, from our observed environment. The ideas must become concrete and alive again. Brotherhood is a beautiful idea, but as an abstraction it means nothing. If, firstly, we know that the human soul lives in the body, through the body, on the physical plane here, that is, in a bodily-spiritual, spiritual-bodily way, and secondly, if we know that the human being is not only spiritual-bodily, but is truly a soul, and thirdly, if we that the soul is filled with spirits, and so, if one knows the soul as threefold and the human being as threefold, one knows the human being in his composition of body, soul and spirit: then one has begun to give concrete form to the abstract three ideas of brotherhood, freedom and equality. To say of man in general, of this abstract man, that he should live in brotherhood, freedom and equality, is nothing but a torrent of words. What is necessary is to acquire a living realization of the fact that man, inasmuch as he lives in the body in the physical world, needs a social order that is based on the foundation of real brotherhood, but that brotherhood can only be understood if one regards man as a body. That is the beginning of the right idea of brotherhood. Brotherhood has only one meaning if one knows that man is a trinity and that brotherhood is applicable to the bodily. Freedom: To understand this, one must know that man has a soul, because bodies can never become free. There is no institution by which bodies can become free; the development of mankind can only be such that souls become free. Freedom, when expressed as a general human idea, is an abstraction. Free souls in relation to fraternally living bodies is a concrete idea. People are equal in spirit. An old folk saying was even aware of this: after death, everyone is equal. It was based on the spirit. By living as spirits, people are equal here on earth, but speaking of equality only makes sense when speaking of this third part of the human being, the spirit. It must come to life, my dear friends, so that one can say: that which walks around here on earth in any order lives in body, soul and spirit. Evolution must progress in such a way that bodies live in brotherhood, souls in freedom, and spirits in equality. There is not enough time today to develop this further, but you will already notice today the very significant difference between abstract ideas of equality, freedom and fraternity and the concrete ideas permeated by knowledge, which are then applied to the right thing.

But what is the reason for the fact that one has become so abstract? Well, what has been lost to humanity is that which, relatively late, was still a mystery truth: that the human being consists of body, soul and spirit. Among the Greeks, it was still common to regard the human being as body, soul and spirit. With the first Church Fathers it was still a matter of course. That which lay in the decline of human development, which in turn needs an ascent from the Christ principle, was dogmatically established by the Council of Constantinople in the year 869 by abolishing the spirit. Forgive me for expressing it so grotesquely. It is only on the surface that what emerged in human consciousness through the circumstances I have described has been established. Since that time, it was no longer permissible to teach in theology that man consists of body, soul and spirit, but rather that man consists only of body and soul, as philosophy professors still teach today. And if some good Wundt or other professor of philosophy in our own time has no inkling that man is a trinity, but always talks of body and soul, then he does not know that he is only following the decrees of the Council of Constantinople of the year 869. He is completely unaware that his teaching is only a reproduction of this council decision. Yes, this “presupposition-free” science, if one knows its developmental history more precisely, sometimes has very strange presuppositions. The presupposition-free science of our present age in philosophy is in fact inconceivable without the Council of Constantinople, only the gentlemen do not know it.

What has been obscured, namely that man consists of body, soul and spirit, must be regained through spiritual science. Therefore, the first thing I tried to do, with full awareness, was to apply it symptomatically to our Central European, anthroposophically oriented spiritual science, namely, to the structure of the human being into body, soul and spirit, as described in the book “Theosophy”. The whole book is built upon this. This had to be presented to humanity radically again and again; humanity had to be made aware of the threefold nature of man through evolution.

You see how, when you are grounded in spiritual science, everything is justified down to the last detail, but also how spiritual science is suited to giving us such ideas, such impulses of feeling and will, that can make us true co-workers in the right progress of the newer development of humanity. And I always wish that I could evoke a feeling that spiritual science must not remain a theory, must not remain a doctrine, that it must not remain something that is cultivated as a science, but that it can become a truly living, inner soul life. This seems to me much more important than the mere enrichment with concepts, which is of course also necessary, because if something is to be enlivened, it must first be grasped. We must have the concepts within us, but the concepts must not remain dead, they must come to life. Then spiritual science works in such a way that when it is grasped in reality, it stimulates the whole person. But then it is also necessary that the whole person tries to understand it perceptively and willfully. But when the whole person understands this spiritual science perceptively and willfully, then he can live accordingly in it. But then he must never run short of love for true knowledge and for humanity as it continues to develop. In our time, this love is still a tender little plant. And it is understandable, even if it is infinitely sad, when in the field of the spiritual-scientific movement, as we understand it, personal interests, sometimes not of a noble kind, still disfigure the tender little plant of love for the knowledge demanded by the times, celebrates its orgies precisely among those who do not approach spiritual science out of a pure longing for knowledge, who approach it in such a way that, if their vanity is not satisfied, their apparent love immediately turns into hatred. For only real love can conquer hatred; apparent love is even a producer of hatred.

If we feel this correctly, then we will also be able to cope with the phenomena to which I have already referred twice, with those phenomena that are looming so sadly over our Anthroposophical Society, in which we see that the strong haters arise precisely from the circles of the Anthroposophical Society. We will not overcome these things as long as we apply a principle of our materialistic time, as we are so fond of doing today: “I want to be left in peace!” — when we close ourselves off to things or do not want to call things by their right name. If numerous defamatory writings are now appearing, nothing is achieved by taking these defamatory writings so seriously that one refutes the individual sentences. For gentlemen such as those who are now writing do not care whether they put this or that as a proposition. To such a gentleman, for example, who had to be rebuffed when he submitted a work that could not be published by us, who felt offended in his ambition as a result, who, while he then became an enemy, to whom one must say: What you write is simply nonsense, you know better yourself; you write all this because your writing has been rejected. That is the truth. If one understands how to serve spiritual science, it is not important to refute all these things in detail as inventions and fabrications, but rather to show in its true light the person who has belonged to the spiritual-scientific movement in appearance and then afterwards does such things as many are now beginning to do, and more will be done.

Or there is someone — as I told you a few days ago — who wanted to become a great painter, but tried it by begging to be allowed to learn; but when every effort was made to help him, he wanted to know everything better. He thought you didn't become a great painter by learning, but by declaring that you were a genius! If you then have the misfortune not to become one, and, despite being given teachers, you can't learn to paint, but only make a mess of things, and if others are not able to recognize the mess as great paintings, then you come and say that it is the fault of the exercises. You cure such a person in the right way by telling the truth. It must not appear as if spiritual science were endangered and things were not being corrected.

Things will fulfill themselves karmically. The right thing should also be done in many other details in our circles, as it has been done on important points of principle. Consider that since 1911 all ties with Mrs. Besant's Theosophical Society have been cut, and that England's war against Germany did not begin until 1914. This is something where it may be said: the Anthroposophical Society has acted prophetically. There is a lot of defamation in general – this is of course not directed against the English people, but against the defamers who today abuse the nationality principle in this way – but defamation against all better judgment, as Mrs. Besant defames our Anthroposophical Society and me, is a rarity. And after we first made the book “The Great Initiates” popular in Germany and staged Schure's plays, we now have to experience being attacked by Schure in the most impossible way. These are things that, to a certain extent, take place in the wide open spaces. But enemies are also gradually emerging in the narrow spaces.

The anthroposophist must acquire a little foresight and a little will to see what is happening and what will come. One acquires this foresight by taking seriously the motto of our Anthroposophical Society, “Wisdom lies only in truth”, even if it is correctly placed as a motto at the beginning. The one who is able to grasp this deeply enough, “Wisdom lies only in truth”, will take the right position.

With this, my dear friends, I must bid you farewell for this time. I hope that our meeting this time can be the starting point for good cooperation in the spirit, even if we cannot be together physically. Let us try to think, feel and will in the spirit of our anthroposophically oriented spiritual science, then we will work together properly.

There has hardly been a time in the development of humanity when it was as necessary as it is in the present to delve into the riddles of the supersensible life, although there has hardly been a time when there was as much rejection of this delving into supersensible problems as there is in the present. The questions that appear to be most remote must be of particular concern to the soul of the modern human being. And so today let us first consider what the materialistic attitude of the present day believes it must keep as far away as possible from human consciousness, but which is in fact infinitely close to human life. And to know that what is meant is infinitely close to human life is precisely one of the special tasks of our time. We want to start with a few remarks that are well known to us, in order to approach a subject that we have often considered from this or that point of view from a different point of view.

We all know that for spiritual scientific observation, it has a special significance to observe human life again and again according to its two great opposites, which play into everyday life, to observe it according to the special essence of the alternating states of sleeping and waking. It is precisely these polar opposites of sleeping and waking that we have had to consider again and again from the most diverse points of view in our spiritual scientific investigation.

Now you already know from the most diverse communications that this distinction, as it is usually made between sleeping and waking, according to which human life is divided up in such a way that one lives in an awake consciousness for about two-thirds or more of the day – or even less – and spends one-third in a sleeping consciousness, is at first only an external and superficial observation. Even if one continues to develop the matter as it is immediately given in this way, in order to get behind the character of sleeping and waking, it still remains somewhat superficial for spiritual-scientific views in relation to the depths that can be reached here. For we must be clear about the fact that the state of sleep is not only present in our soul life when we sleep in the superficial sense, not only in the time that passes between falling asleep and waking up, but that our soul also carries the state of sleep to a certain extent into the so-called waking state. In truth, even when we are awake for ordinary consciousness, we are only partially awake. We are never fully awake in this ordinary state of consciousness. And if we ask ourselves from a spiritual scientific point of view: to what extent are we fully awake? — then we have to give ourselves the answer: we are awake with regard to everything that we call perception of the external sense world, as well as the processing of these perceptions of the external sense world through the ideas. In our life of perception and imagination, in our thinking life, we are undoubtedly awake. We would not even think of speaking of our waking state if we did not want to describe as such a waking state a certain inner state of mind that is present when we perceive the external world in a fully conscious state and think about it, forming ideas about it.

But we cannot say that we are awake for our emotional life in the same sense as we are for our perceptual and imaginative life. It is only an illusion if one believes that one is as awake with regard to one's emotional life, one's affective life, one's emotional life from waking up to falling asleep as one is with regard to one's perception and thinking or imagining. Those who surrender themselves to this illusion do so because we always accompany our feelings with images. We not only imagine external things, we not only imagine chairs and tables and trees and clouds, but we also imagine our feelings; and by imagining our feelings, we wake up in the images of our feelings. But the feelings themselves surge up from the subconscious depths of the soul. For the one who can observe the inner soul processes, the feelings, the affects, the emotions, and the passions do not arise in a greater inner wakefulness than the impressions of the dream. The impressions of the dream are pictorial. We know how to distinguish them quite precisely for the ordinary consciousness of the external perceptions. Our consciousness is no more alert to the real feelings than it is to the dream. If we were to add an image to every dream as soon as we wake up, without being able to distinguish between the dream and the presentation of the dream, just as we always add a thought, an image, to our feelings, we would also consider our dreams to be the content of an awake experience. In themselves, our feelings are not experienced in a more awake state than our dreams.

And even less are our volitional impulses experienced in a waking state. With regard to the will, man sleeps continually. He imagines something when he wills something; he has an idea when he — let us take a simple volitional impulse — stretches out his hand to grasp something. But what actually happens in the life of soul and body when we stretch out a hand to draw something near remains in the unconscious, like dreamless sleep. While we dream our feelings, we oversleep our will impulses in reality. As a person of feeling we dream, as a person of will we also sleep in the so-called waking state, so that actually even when we are awake, that is, from waking to falling asleep, we are only awake with half of our being, while we continue to sleep with the other half of our being. We are awake in relation to our perceptions and our thoughts, but we continue to sleep and dream in relation to our will and our feelings. Such things can hardly be proved or corroborated more strongly than by what has just been said in the way of suggestion. For the recognition of such things depends on whether one can properly observe the life of the soul. He who can properly observe this life of the soul will unerringly discover the inner psychic equality of feelings, affects, passions and dreams. There is a very beautiful essay by Friedrich Theodor Vischer, the so-called V-Vischer, who is particularly well known in this city, about “Dream Fantasy”, in which he emphasizes this correct observation of the relationship between the emotional and passionate life and the dream world in a very beautiful way.

So we also go through life in a waking state, not only surrounded by the world we perceive through our senses, by the world we think, but also surrounded by a world that we can only dream of in our feelings, of which we, as with our will impulses standing in it, no longer experience more than we experience of our surroundings in our sleep, namely actually nothing. But a world that we do not experience when we are asleep is still just around us. Just as the tables and chairs and the other objects are in the room where there is a sleeper who, however, is unaware of them while he sleeps, so man is unaware of the world from which his emotional and volitional impulses come because he is constantly asleep with regard to this world. But this world, in relation to which we are constantly asleep, is the one that we have in common with human souls that are no longer embodied in the body.

We have tried from a variety of perspectives to build a spiritual bridge between the so-called living and the so-called dead. We can also build this bridge conceptually by becoming aware that we are connected to people in their physical bodies in our ordinary waking state because they are accessible to our perception and our thought life. We are not connected to the so-called dead in our ordinary waking state because we are constantly asleep to part of the world around us. If we were to penetrate into this world, which we so oversleep, we would no longer be separated from the world in which man lives between death and a new birth. Just as we are surrounded by the air, so we are surrounded by the world in which man finds himself between death and a new birth, only we know nothing of this world, precisely for the reason given: because we oversleep it. The clairvoyant consciousness, in the way we have often characterized it, leads to the recognition of this world, which is otherwise overslept, this world in which man finds himself between death and a new birth. To enter into this world in such a way that one can be certain that one's soul passes through the gate of death, enters another world and returns in a new earthly life, is not difficult in itself, if one carefully considers what is contained in the book 'How to Know Higher Worlds' or in similar books.

It is much more difficult to penetrate into this world, which man passes through between death and a new birth, in such a way that concrete, definite relationships can be established between the person here in the physical body and concrete dead people. These relationships are always there to a certain extent, at least between certain living people and certain dead people. But the reasons why a person is not aware that relationships always exist between him and certain so-called dead people can be seen in what I have already said today. And precisely that which the seeing consciousness experiences when it can relate to individual dead people can teach us why man in ordinary waking consciousness learns nothing of his relationships with the dead, which, as I said, are always present as real relationships. If such conscious relations are to be established between the seeing, awakening consciousness and certain dead, one must appropriate certain soul experiences that are quite different from the soul experiences to which we have become accustomed in waking consciousness. It is precisely in this area that it becomes apparent how one must discard all habits that one has developed for the purpose of knowing the physical environment and replace them with others if one wants to penetrate with a seeing consciousness into the concrete spiritual world. When the seer is confronted with a very specific individual so-called dead person, then he can indeed communicate with him properly, but he must just get beyond certain soul habits. The way one experiences the soul in such a case naturally causes bewilderment in someone who is not accustomed to such visions.

When we stand here in the physical world and converse with another person, we know that When we say something to the other person, it comes from our own vocal organs, so to speak, radiating out from us and going to the other person. And when he answers us or in turn communicates something to us, it radiates out from his vocal organs and over to us. —- It is quite different when one has concrete relationships between the seeing consciousness and a very specific dead person. In that case, one has to completely change one's habits. When we ourselves communicate something to the dead, when we ask the dead, when we tell him something, then we must — as strange as it may sound — have acquired the ability to perceive what we ourselves say as coming from him, as emanating from him and radiating to us. In order to be able to convey a message to a dead person, we have to be able to tune out ourselves and live in him in such a way that he actually speaks when we ask him, when we convey a message to him. And again, when he answers us, when he wants to convey a message to us, it comes from our own soul, it announces itself in such a way that we know: it radiates from us, so to speak. So we have to turn around completely, turn back, if we want to come into a real relationship with a specific dead person. This is, even if it can be characterized in a simple way, an extraordinarily difficult thing to do in our emotional experience. To behave in an almost opposite way to the world around us, as we are accustomed to in the physical world, is something that is extremely difficult to acquire. But genuine communication with the so-called dead is only possible under these conditions.

On the other hand, if you consider that you have to completely change your inner attitude, you will understand that relationships between the so-called living and the so-called dead are always possible, but that the so-called living will show little inclination to recognize these relationships. For the living are accustomed—and such an habit means more than one usually thinks—when they say something, to perceive it radiating from themselves; when the other says something, to perceive it radiating from the other. And anyone who is completely rusty in the prejudices of the physical world will, from the outset, have to find something like what I have just said quite foolish. But it is like this: you cannot penetrate into the spiritual world if you do not familiarize yourself with the fact that in the spiritual world, much - I say much, not everything - is exactly the opposite of the habits we have acquired here in the physical world. And what I have just discussed is one such thoroughly opposite experience. Only when one has familiarized oneself with such unusual things through very intimate practice can one form an opinion about the nature of the ordinary relationships that each person has with certain dead people, and how these relationships develop.

As I said, these relationships are constantly present. We just have to bear in mind, if we want to take a look at these relationships, that in addition to the polar opposites of the day's experiences, waking and sleeping, we have two others that are particularly important for the relationships between the so-called living and the so-called dead, but which, when consciously experienced, go against the usual habits of human beings. In addition to the usual waking and sleeping, there is also the process of falling asleep and waking up. These fleeting moments of falling asleep and waking up are just as important for the overall spiritual life of a person as the long periods of sleeping and waking, but they pass by in a flash. The reason a person does not experience the moment of waking up is because the full awakening follows immediately afterwards, and the person is not inclined to perceive as quickly as they would have to perceive if they wanted to grasp the fleeting moment of awakening; it is drowned out, deafened, by the waking life that follows. In more naive human conditions, where people knew a lot about such things, they also hinted at what it means for the human soul in this respect. But little by little, as materialism progresses, these things are being lost. Among naive, primitive people in the countryside, you still often hear it said that when you wake up, you shouldn't look straight into the bright window, you shouldn't open your eyes right away. Such talk arises from a very deep instinct, from the instinct not to immediately deafen the moment of waking through the waking day life, in order to be able to hold on to something that is there in the moment of waking.

But the moment of falling asleep is equally important, only that usually one falls asleep immediately afterwards. Then consciousness ceases. And so the moment of falling asleep is not properly observed by the ordinary consciousness.

What is important for the relationship between a person embodied in the physical world and the dead, however, is what can be experienced and is actually experienced in the moments of falling asleep and waking up. Such things can, of course, only be observed with the seeing consciousness. But when the seeing consciousness has brought about a state in which it can establish such relationships with certain dead people, relationships that can only be established through the complete transformation and readjustment of the soul's state that I have mentioned, then it can also judge what the real, but unconscious, relationships of the so-called living to the so-called dead are like. The most favorable moment to bring to the dead all kinds of relationships we ourselves have developed in our souls to certain dead people is when we fall asleep. And the most favorable moment to receive answers, messages from the dead into physical life on earth is when we wake up.

You do not have to be put off by the fact that what I have just said requires the person to address a question to the dead person when falling asleep, to send a message to the dead, and only to receive an answer or a return message at the moment of waking up. With regard to the supersensible world, the time conditions are quite different. What is separated by hours here for the physical world does not necessarily have to be separated in real supersensible life. One can definitely say: While here in physical life, when one asks someone, one expects an answer immediately, there one perceives the relationship in such a way that when one addresses questions to the dead while falling asleep, one receives the answer upon waking up. This relationship really always exists between the living and the dead. In fact, every person who has lost their loved ones to the physical plane by crossing the threshold of death has such relationships, which experience their most important development when falling asleep and waking up. They are not brought up into consciousness only because these favorable moments flit by quickly and man is not accustomed to taking into consciousness what approaches his soul in these quickly fleeting moments. To hold on to what approaches us in such fleeting moments, there is nothing more suitable than to occupy oneself with the finer, more subtle thoughts of spiritual science. If someone appropriates spiritual science in such a way that it is not mere head knowledge, but an inner substance of the soul itself, something that is grasped not only with cleverness but with love, so that it passes completely into the soul, if someone does not just cling to the thoughts of spiritual science with scientific curiosity or curiosity, but pursues them with love, to such a person this love sinks into the soul with such power that, with a little attention, he gradually becomes aware of the great significance of the moments of falling asleep and waking up. And the more spiritual science will sink into the souls of men, the more men will take up into real life not only what they experience when awake, but also what comes to them from a supersensible world when they fall asleep, but especially when they wake up. We must only be clear about the fact that we can only establish such real relationships, as I mean them now, with those dead with whom we are somehow connected karmically. But we are connected karmically with many more souls than we realize. For the conscious or unconscious communication between the living and the dead, however, the karmic connection is as necessary as it is necessary to direct the eye to a sense object in order to perceive it. Just as the sense relationship must be established, so it is a prerequisite for communication between the living and the dead that certain karmic relationships exist between them, or at least be established.

If we now consider the moment of falling asleep, it is the moment that is particularly favorable for us to bring up the relationships we have developed with someone who has passed away and who was dear and precious to us, who was otherwise karmically connected to us. The moment of falling asleep is particularly good for this. We naturally develop our relationships with the dead, with whom we are karmically connected, in the waking day life from waking up to falling asleep. We commemorate the dead. Everything we think in relation to the dead, that we would like to bring to them, that we would like to tell them, is then compressed in the moment of falling asleep and, even if it remains unconscious to us, reaches the dead for the ordinary consciousness. Only a certain state of mind is particularly favorable for these communications, another state of mind unfavorable.

You see, mere dry, cold thinking about the dead is not very suitable for really reaching the dead, for getting a message through to them. If we want the moment of falling asleep to become, as it were, a gateway through which our own experiences of soul that are related to the dead can reach the dead, then we must occupy ourselves with the dead in a different way while we are awake than by thinking cold, dry thoughts. We must try to stir up thoughts that connected us with the dead person while he was still living among the so-called living. But we must then put particular thought into what can establish a connection through the heart. Thinking of the dead person indifferently does not help much. But everything that keeps us connected to him through our hearts is good to call to mind: how one was with the dead person here or there, how one just talked with him, by developing an active interest in something that particularly interested him, out of one's own feelings; or to recall a situation in which one was once dead man here in life and something that touched him also touched you, or vice versa; how you were tempted to share something you had experienced with the other person because you liked him, to experience it together with him. Not dry thoughts, but thoughts permeated with love, with feeling! These thoughts then remain in our soul until the moment we fall asleep. And that is when we find the gate through which they can safely reach the dead person as a message.

We should not deceive ourselves about these things. We dream of the dead. When we dream of the dead, in a great many cases – not all, of course – it is because of a real relationship with the dead person. But what we dream, in so far as it follows the moment of falling asleep, is actually only a dream-like, pictorial transformation of what we want to communicate to the dead person. We do not experience the moment of falling asleep as the moment when thoughts, as just characterized, really go over to the dead, because this moment of falling asleep passes by so quickly. But this moment of falling asleep actually resonates in the following sleep, resonates in the dream. If we understand the matter correctly, we will not interpret dreams of the dead as messages from the dead. They could be, but usually are not. They are half-remembered impulses that tell us the following. If we dream of a dead person, it means that on a previous day we addressed such a thought to the dead person, either voluntarily or involuntarily, as I have characterized it. This thought has found its way to the dead person, and the dream indicates to us that we were actually speaking to the dead person. What the dead person then answers us, what the dead person communicates to us, these messages from the dead come in particularly easily at the moment of waking up. And they would come much more easily to the so-called living if they only had time in our present time, if they had the inclination to pay a little attention to what comes up between the lines of life from deep within their consciousness.

Yes, today's man is vain and selfish, and when something arises in his soul, he is usually clear about the fact that it is his genius that has caused it to arise. Being modest is an admonition put into life; being modest in the depths of one's being is not so easy for a person. Being modest also means that one really learns to distinguish between what arises from one's own soul and what arises from one's own soul from foreign, supersensible impulses. Just as the one who has the seeing consciousness feels and perceives the dead person's answer rising up from his or her own soul, so these answers from the dead, these messages from the dead in the waking period, from waking to falling asleep, come up from the depths of the soul. However, one can say: Just as a person does not see the stars during the day – although they are constantly in the sky – because sunlight drowns them out, a person is just as unaware of what is constantly coming up from the depths of his soul in his ordinary consciousness because the external life, which is caused by the impressions of the senses, drowns it out. When we become familiar, I would say, with our own soul, when we learn to distinguish between that which originates from ourselves and that which sounds from our own soul as something foreign, then, little by little, we also learn to recognize messages from the dead in our waking daily life. But then one connects something extraordinarily important with this knowledge. Then one says to oneself: We are actually not separated from the dead, the dead live among us. They do not announce themselves in the same way as other sensual beings, who send their impulses to us from outside, but they announce themselves from within, they speak to us through our own inner being, they carry us.

However, humanity in the present and near future will find it difficult to get used to the idea that the impulses under which they act come only from the sensual world around them, to recognize that in what we call our social, our other life, not only the so-called living lives, but also the so-called deceased, that the dead are always there and work in us and with us. In mythical form, the ancients knew this. When the ancients revered the deceased as tribal lords, as ancestral gods, it was because the ancients had atavistic knowledge that the dead are always there, that they are always at work through the living. This awareness had to be lost for good reasons for humanity, but it must come back! We must know again that the dead are in our midst, that the dead speak through our soul, that we have fellowship with the dead. We must recognize that spiritual science must be asked how life is actually constituted and that external science about life must be misleading because it does not know how to distinguish between what comes from the sensual world and what comes from the supersensible world. Our historiography has gradually become something grotesquely absurd. People speak of ideas that are supposed to live in history as if the ideas flew in like hummingbirds or other birds, whereas in truth the impulses that are often present as historical impulses are precisely the impulses of the dead.

This awareness of communal life with the dead must be developed. And as this awareness develops, and as human soul life becomes more refined through the concepts of spiritual science, which only then do not refine human life when they are conceived theoretically and not lovingly, all this will, so to speak, make the dead present for the consciousness of humanity as well. Then the great part of reality that today remains unconscious and unconsidered will also be considered. Only then will one live with the full reality and in the full reality. This is a task for humanity from this time on. For humanity is presently living in a great catastrophe. The deeper reasons why this catastrophe has arisen are that people have forgotten how to live in reality. Through their materialistic consciousness, people are far removed from reality. They believe that they are close to reality because they only accept one part of reality, the sensual reality, and consider the other to be mere fantasy. But it is precisely by not recognizing one half of reality that one separates oneself from reality. This does not lead to a deeper understanding of reality. If only people would realize that what I have just said is very, very practical for the present day!

Our children and young people are learning history today. In modern times, and for a long time already, people have become accustomed to learning history, that is, what they regard as history. But how much have people learned from history? Well, people today are very often called upon to ask themselves in the face of events that occur as elementary events every hour: What does history teach us about this? The phrase can be read again and again: one can learn this or that from history. People just don't learn anything from reality. Never before could one have learned so much from reality as in the last three and a half years. But countless people are oversleeping this infinitely meaningful reality. When these catastrophic events began, very clever people who believed that they had learned a great deal from history expressed their opinions about how long these war events, as they called them, could last. With the reasons they could have, they were also able to substantiate what they had expressed; they said: Four to six months; according to the knowledge one can have, this war catastrophe cannot last longer than that. They were experts who spoke in this way. Well, the facts turned out differently. And one truly does not need to be an insignificant person to judge in this way, seduced by what we call history in more recent times. In 1789, a truly significant person took up his professorship in history at the university and gave an inaugural address in which this truly significant person said at the time that history teaches that it is very likely that in the future the peoples of Europe will have all sorts of quarrels with each other, but that they will no longer be able to tear each other apart; after all, humanity is too advanced for that. In 1789, a not insignificant person, Friedrich Schiller, made this statement when he took up his professorship, based on his study of history, to which Schiller himself could devote himself. But what followed what Schiller said? The French Revolution; the great wars at the beginning of the 19th century. And if it were a lesson of history that the people of Europe, as members of one great family, could never again tear each other apart, then all the events of the present would be all the more impossible.

However strange it may sound, it is necessary to change our thinking about these things. What has been called history is not history at all. The forces that are supersensible are at work in the historical life of mankind. The dead have an influence on historical life, and a judgment based on history will only emerge when this judgment is made on a spiritual-scientific basis. Until this happens, history will never teach anything, history will never become a practical science, and it will never be suitable for providing maxims for what is to happen. This is why people today are so helpless in the face of events, because it is necessary in our time that spiritual maxims become the practical basis of life. As long as this does not happen, catastrophic events cannot truly be overcome.

I have said: thoughts that arise from an emotional relationship with the dead person and that are remembered in such a way that one also remembers this emotional relationship are particularly favorable for getting in touch with the dead. It is particularly favorable to get an answer from the dead, particularly favorable for the dead to influence our lives, if we really know the dead, if we have the opportunity to delve into his being. Spiritual science will also be able to provide the impetus to delve into the nature of other people. Because today, due to the materialistic state of mind, it is hardly possible for people to know each other in life. They think they know each other, but they just pass each other by, talk past each other. Today, you can be married to someone for thirty or more years and know very little about them. It requires a certain refinement of soul to know the nature of another. If one can know the nature of the other as one's own, then the prerequisite is to call one's nature before the soul. If we call the nature of a dead person to whom we want to ask questions before our soul by visualizing something that connects us emotionally with him, and if we imagine his nature quite vividly, then we are sure to get surely receive an answer; then it is only for us to develop the necessary attention for the interplay of what we address to the dead, with what is sure to come back from the dead when the emotional relationships mentioned are recalled. It is then possible that what we bring to the dead will find its answer from the dead if we can vividly imagine what we have truly understood of his nature.

The consciousness that sees can provide information about many other specific relationships with the dead. Today I will speak of one more. You see, those who pass through the gateway of death as our relatives or friends or otherwise karmically related to us, they either pass away as children or young people or as older people. If you observe with the seeing consciousness what the relationships are like with the various dead, then you can say the following with regard to this passing away at different ages. When children or young people pass through the gate of death, the relationship they maintain with those left behind can be described as follows: those who were their relatives here do not lose their children or younger people; they actually remain right there in the vicinity. And that, which we feel as pain, as grief, takes on its character through this. When a human being endowed with consciousness observes the pain of soul that a mother or father feels over a child who has passed away, this pain of soul is quite different from the pain felt as a young person when an older person dies. Of course, on a superficial, external level, these experiences of the soul are more or less the same, but if you look at them more intimately, they are fundamentally different. The people who have died younger do not go away, they actually remain – that is how you can describe the relationship – and they live on with our souls, live on in our souls. And actually the pain we feel, the grief we feel, is what the younger deceased experience in us. This is transferred into our pain, into our grief. They stay with us. It is a transference of their own pain, which does not have to be pain, but then becomes pain for us when it is transferred into our souls.

The grief we feel for an older person is actually a personal pain. I would say it is less a pain of sympathy and more of selfishness, our own selfish pain. For if we want to describe the relationship of the younger person left behind here to the older deceased from the point of view of the observing consciousness, we can say: the older deceased does not lose us. We do not lose the younger deceased; the older deceased does not lose us, those left behind, but to a certain extent takes the soul with him, carries it with him in its forces on his further path. He does not lose those who remain behind. And so our relationship to such an older deceased person is quite different from that to a younger deceased person. The older deceased does not tend to live in the soul of the person who remains behind, because he takes with him the inner being, the imprint of the inner being.

What I just said is not insignificant in life, because what we call the memory of the dead is given a very specific light through it. In younger people it is good to cultivate this memory – I would say the cult of the dead – in such a way, to develop it, that we remain more general, that we arrange the thoughts or the cultic actions or other things that are intended to cultivate the memory in such a way that we do not go into the individual, the personal side of the dead person, but have great world feelings and thoughts in view of the dead. In this way, the one who died young and remains with us feels at home. In the case of someone who died older, it is especially good if one can go into his individuality, if the thoughts one addresses to him are shaped in such a way that they have something to do with his personality, are shaped towards his personality. For someone who has died more recently, it is particularly good if the funeral service is arranged in such a way that a kind of cult, a generally established cult that has a symbolic meaning, is developed. For people who have died more recently, the Catholic funeral service is particularly suitable, which in most countries is less concerned with individual circumstances or not at all, but is a symbolic general funeral service for everyone. For souls who have died young, who of course remain there, it is best to develop general world symbols, general world feelings with regard to them, with rites that apply equally to everyone. For those who have died older, the Protestant funeral service, where more attention is paid to the individual course of life and more reference is made to the personal side of the deceased, is better. And also in the individual memory that one dedicates to such a deceased person, that which is personally connected with him, which is not applicable to every deceased person, but only to him, is to be preferred.

If one knows these things, then our emotional life with regard to the deceased will also be graded and differentiated. We know how to distinguish how the soul should behave towards a younger or older deceased. Life is enriched in its most intimate relationships when one absorbs the idea from spiritual science that not only the souls living in physical bodies belong to one another, but also the disembodied souls. Only then does man enter into full reality. It must be said again and again: to speak of the spirit in general does not lead very far. To speak of spiritual life in general, as certain philosophers do, or as people do who today also believe that they can overcome materialism by speaking in general of spirit and spirit and spirit: that does not lead very far. We muster the courage to penetrate into the concrete spiritual life. We muster the courage to unreservedly confess such conditions, as we have discussed them again today, before the world, no matter how great the mockery of materialistic thinkers may still be at present. Today one cannot see how much that is infinitely fatal for humanity, infinitely disastrous, is connected with the fact that people know nothing about these things in the most important parts of the world and therefore do not think about them, and are therefore so far removed from reality, which must then devastatingly befall them. The present earth catastrophe will be ascribed to all possible impulses, only not to those in which it really originates in the deepest sense.

This is the place to reflect on the full significance that an anthroposophically oriented spiritual-scientific worldview must have in European intellectual life, as we understand it here. How people relate to the spirit and to spiritual content will be of great importance in the not-too-distant future. For important and significant things are preparing themselves in the life of mankind on earth. One cannot help but, if one comes even a little out of the sleepy state in which, unfortunately, so many people are, think more deeply about certain things than has been thought in Europe for centuries. The times urge people to learn to rethink. Actually, you can see that people are rethinking; the only question is whether they are doing so in a truly profound way or whether they are refraining from doing so altogether, or whether they are doing so in the way that very many people are doing now. You can see that people are rethinking, it's just that sometimes it comes out in a very strange way. You could give not hundreds, but thousands of examples.

You see, one of those people who have changed their thinking terribly over the last three and a half years is the former French socialist and journalist Gustave Herve. He publishes a newspaper, he calls it 'Gloire', which has also been renamed from a less provocative name. This Herve is actually one of those who currently write in the spirit of the most furious French jingoism. One can say that even compared to a tigerish, bullish chauvinist like Clemenceau, Herve is actually even more French-chauvinist – and he has changed his views. Four years ago, he was still quite a cosmopolitan, who laughed at anyone who was somehow, I won't even say, French-chauvinist, but who was just somehow French-nationalist. He was a true cosmopolitan, this Herve. Now what he writes is so vitriolic that one can read between every line one reads of his: he would actually prefer that the French tricolour become an instrument to slay everything opposed to the French. Nevertheless, Herve did make a significant statement, though it was before this war. This saying is the following: The tricolor belongs on the dunghill! — So little was this man, who is now one of the most chauvinistic Frenchmen, nationally minded as a Frenchman, that he rose to say: the tricolor—he means the French tricolor—belongs on the dunghill. So he despised everything national. He has already relearned, rethought, only of course in a way that is not very profound. What should happen in a time happens – it is important to note this; the only question is how it turns out for one or the other, how one or the other really pays attention to their task for humanity. Above all, it is necessary in this re-education that the European man does not oversleep the significant things that are currently being prepared for all of humanity on earth. Over in Asia, especially in the Orient, a sum of judgments is being prepared about Europe, namely about Central Europe – we are particularly interested in Central Europe at the present time – judgments are being prepared that will gradually actually combine to form historical impulses. The Oriental, the Japanese, the Indian, the Chinese, are gradually feeling challenged to develop certain impulses within themselves. And to a high degree, such impulses have already been formed. To a certain degree, there are judgments, especially among leading Orientals, about Central European, about German nature, which should certainly be heeded, because what lives in these impulses will become history in the not too distant future. It may seem very strange, but today one should develop a fine sensitivity for such things; one should know that today it is necessary to foresee a little of what must come in order to keep pace with reality. The Orientals who are preparing to enter into a relationship with Europe, who are forming their judgments, which will become world politics in the future, these Orientals have their age-old views about spiritual life. They see what has been going on in Europe for centuries, but they see it only in a one-sided way, because this Europe, namely this Central Europe, shows them their own nature in a one-sided way. Yes, what do the leading Orientals believe, for example, about this Central European nature? They believe what they must believe from what they actually see. They believe that Central Europe is particularly skilled at organizing state, commercial and other relationships; that Central Europe is particularly skilled at submitting to the external science taught in schools in Europe and surrendering to the authority of this science. These Orientals cannot particularly appreciate what comes from this organization or from science, because they are aware that they have an ancient spirituality that is based on completely different impulses than we Europeans can have. The leading Oriental, in particular, will never be impressed by what European natural science, for example, has to offer; he will never be impressed by what European industry produces, even if he, like the Japanese, will accept it in an external way; he will never be impressed by what European organization is able to achieve. For he is aware that none of this establishes a relationship to the real essence of things. He feels that this relationship exists between his soul and the soul of the universe. He feels spiritually akin to the soul of the universe. Let us be quite clear about this. The Oriental would approach what corresponds to such a way of looking at things, as we have practiced here or elsewhere today, quite differently than he would approach the European machine, the European organization, the European external science of the mind. And however strange it may seem, we may well ask ourselves what the Orient would say if it could know that from the fruits of the spiritual life in Europe, as expressed by Herder, Schiller, Goethe, and the Romantics, , a true, concrete spiritual contemplation of the world, which adds something special to the oriental contemplation of the spirit that the Oriental cannot find through his disposition, but which he could appreciate and with which he could agree? Of course, you may say: Goethe is sufficiently known throughout the world, and the leaders of Oriental intellectual life can also get to know Goethe, and Goethe is a source, an infinite source for the intellectual life of Central Europe. All this is true, absolutely true. But has Central Europe already come to truly recognize Goethe as such a source? One could talk about this point at length. The Oriental looks at what Central Europe has been able to make of Goethe. Much could be said about this, but I will give just one example: Central Europe has known how to pass over the most important impulses of Goethe in silence, but it has a Goethe Society. This Goethe Society was founded at a truly propitious moment. The starting point was an excellent one. It may be said that few constellations were as favorable for such things as this one at the end of the 1880s. When the last descendant of Goethe handed over the estate to a princess, everything could have been well initiated, would have been well tackled, and would have given an initial impulse from which one could have believed: now the spiritual sources will be drawn from Goethe! Much has happened, and the Goethe Society was also founded at that time. But let us take the Oriental who asks: In the Orient we have a life that connects the soul directly to the world soul. Over there they have organizations of state and social conditions, over there they have machines and industry, they have a science that is taught in school and weighs on the soul with tremendous authority; but they have no relationship of the soul of the human being to the soul of the universe. If he knew what relationships were lying latent, if he knew what could be his after what could be experienced in Goethe, he would speak and think and feel differently. But what does he see? Well, he may ask himself: Yes, this Central Europe has managed to found a Goethe Society to honor one of its greatest minds. But it has also managed to have a former finance minister as the president of this Goethe Society today. - It is only symbolic of much more. One can say: there must live in our soul the impulse to make the world aware that from the source of the German spirit can emerge the impulses of spiritual science. They will not be overlooked in the Orient. If they were overlooked, then the judgment would have to form in the Orient as a historical impulse: This Central European culture is actually harmful to humanity. — And this judgment has become established to a high degree. It would certainly be corrected if it were known that this Central European spiritual life is capable of transforming even the most mechanical of mechanisms into beauty, into soul, through those impulses that it has within itself and that it can develop into real knowledge and real processing of the supersensible. So it could actually work in one direction.

And if we look at the other side: in the West, in America, not only the Central European way of life but the whole of Europe is seen in the same way as one can only get to know it from the outside, because of course not only the Goethe Society, with the former finance minister at its head, but also the other things are seen in a similar way, but not what can live in souls as what has passed through our souls today. While in the Orient they say: This Europe, this European life is harmful – in America they find it superfluous. Because the Americans can build machines, organize industry, and found Goethe Societies with people who understand Goethe scholarship as much as what is needed to put together financial budgets. But what flows from Goethe as the deepest source of spiritual life, the Americans cannot do that; they can only have it if they take it from the Central Europeans.

It is not just some mystical eccentricity, my dear friends, it is a question deeply connected with the practical necessities of life in the present, how we relate to the impulses to let the world know and feel, as much as is possible in us, what could live in European culture in terms of spirituality, which paths it could currently have to the supersensible. Today more than ever it is necessary to remember that spiritual science in our sense is not just something with which we want to do good to our own soul, but that spiritual science must become something through which we as human beings in the right sense, as human beings of Central Europe, can fulfill our task in the development of humanity.

Yesterday we tried to get to know more precisely the world that surrounds us in such a way that we share it with those who have passed through the gate of death and that we also share it with those spiritual and soul beings that we count among the beings of the higher hierarchies. In this way, we have devoted ourselves to a contemplation that is suitable for opening up to us a part of that reality that plays a part in human life, without man, with his sensory perception and also with his mind tied to sensory perception, being able to know anything about it in his ordinary waking consciousness. Since this world is a reality, a reality that plays a part in the shaping of human life, it is understandable that in the time in which we live, in which man is called more and more, take the general destiny of human development into his own hands, as we have often said, that in such a time a knowledge of these supersensible things also sinks into the human soul. Yesterday we ended our meditation, which, as a meditation on the life of the so-called dead, must be deeply penetrating for each individual human soul, with the suggestion that this is particularly necessary in our time. On the other hand, however, there must also be an urgent need to reflect more closely on such things, such as those we touched on in our meditation yesterday. For in our time even half-awake people, dreaming people, should suspect that extraordinarily important decisions are being formed.

In the course of our discussions, I have repeatedly given hints here and there about what can be said from the sources of spiritual research about the character of modern times, the character of our time itself and the near future. Such things could only be given to present-day humanity, and more or less to anthroposophically minded humanity, in a very cautious way. Just see how much of this can be found in the lectures given in Kristiania many years before these catastrophic events, for the understanding of precisely these difficult, catastrophic times. And perhaps it may also be recalled that at a time when it would have been necessary to point out, in one way or another, the seriousness of the impulses at hand, in the lecture cycle that was held in Vienna in the early spring of 1914 – that is, before the outbreak of our present world catastrophe -–, the way in which social life, the way in which human coexistence in our time is spoken of, I chose a sharp, a strong expression: I spoke at the time in these lectures, which were essentially also about the life of man between death and a new birth, of the fact that something is happening in the moral and social life of the present that can be described as a social carcinoma, as a terrible social cancer. Perhaps one or the other at that time found this to be a strong expression. But perhaps one or the other has since been able to convince himself that the facts speak for it, that such a strong expression was allowed to be chosen at the time.

However, what I already hinted at yesterday is correct and should give us much food for thought: despite all this, despite the fact that it can easily be surmised what serious impulses lie in the lap of our time, humanity today is little inclined to really grasp the seriousness of the phenomena. Today, humanity is far too comfortable for that, far too happy to indulge in those comfortable concepts that can be found in the scientific world view today, because these concepts can be gained from the handrails of external experience, because they do not require much inner effort of the mind and yet they flatter people's vanity so much. But what is necessary is that humanity should wake up, really wake up, to much of what the times demand of us today. This awakening will only be possible if certain underlying facts are no longer regarded as fantasies or dreams but as realities that play a part in our times. And so I have often hinted during our discussions that a significant change has occurred to humanity, particularly in the last third of the 19th century. I have also hinted at these things here in Stuttgart. Today, we want to once again call them to mind from a certain point of view.

I have indicated the fall of 1879 as the turning point in the development of humanity in modern times. If we want to understand this development of humanity in modern times more precisely, we must say that what happened in the last third of the 19th century is only the effect of something that happened in the spiritual world before. It began in the spiritual world in the 1840s. And the time from the forties to the end of the seventies of the 19th century is an important and essential, a significant time. What happened then did not happen on the physical plane; but in the year 1879 the repercussions descended on to the physical plane, and since that time these repercussions have been taking place on the physical plane. They are a kind of reflection of what happened before in the spiritual world. If one is to describe what underlies this, one can say that in a particular field in a particular sphere it is the manifestation of what otherwise happens more often in the development of humanity, and what has always been described by those who were still able to observe such things as a struggle between Michael and the dragon. In the most diverse fields, such struggles of normally progressing spiritual beings of the higher hierarchies against spirits of hindrance and obstruction have taken place. For the cultural development of humanity, such a struggle has taken place in spiritual realms, and in those spiritual realms that are directly adjacent to the earth, in the decades from the 1840s to the end of the 1870s. At that time, in 1879, this battle ended with a victory, if one may say so, of the good powers against certain spirits of obstruction, which at that time - one can put it that way - were thrown down from the spiritual worlds into earthly conditions, so that since then they have been working and weaving in earthly conditions. Within that which is developing in the spiritual evolution of humanity, there are spirits of hindrance that were only overthrown at the end of the 1970s and hurled down into the lower world for the upper world, and now rule in people.

If we look at these spirits of hindrance, these spirits of an Ahrimanic nature, with which the spirits that we can call Michaelic spirits have fought a fierce battle, we have to say that these Ahrimanic spirits had a good significance in past periods of human development, they had their tasks in past periods of spiritual development. These tasks were carried out in such a way that they were guided by good higher spirits. We must not imagine the so-called evil spirits in such a way that we think we just have to flee from them in order to get rid of them if possible. That is namely the best way to attach them to oneself if one wants to get rid of them in an egoistic way; rather, one has to imagine that these so-called evil spirits are also in the service of the wise world order. If they are only placed in their right position, they will perform services that are necessary for the wise world order. And so we can say that for centuries, even for millennia, these ahrimanic spirits have performed the task of dividing human beings into those community contexts that have to do with blood ties. People are connected in their earthly associations in such a way that the bonds of blood also trigger and bring about certain bonds of love. People organize themselves into family, tribal, ethnic and racial contexts. All these things are subject to certain laws of the times. These are directed by beings from the higher worlds. That which humanity has specialized, that which humanity has structured in such a way that this structure is based on blood, was guided by these Ahrimanic spirits, but under the guidance of good spirits.

But now a different era was to begin. As long as human beings were guided by blood, so to speak, they could not take their destiny into their own hands in the way that has been suggested several times. For this it was necessary that the service of these Ahrimanic spirits, as it was, be eliminated from the spiritual world. These spirits initially wanted to continue their activity of dividing people according to blood from the spiritual world; but humanity was to be driven to a more general conception of its entire spirit. What is often said in our field, that humanity is to be understood as a whole on earth, is truly not a cliché, but a modern necessity. And this is based on the fact that a strong, intense struggle has taken place between the Michaelic spirits and the spirits of Ahrimanic nature, which in the past differentiated people according to blood.

This battle has ended with the Ahrimanic entities being pushed down and now prevailing among people. They will cause confusion among people, because that is their intention after this defeat: to cause confusion with everything that can be drawn from all kinds of concepts and ideas related to blood ties and blood relationships. It is particularly important to realize that since the last third of the nineteenth century, these impulses have been active in everything that human beings can achieve here on the physical plane through their thoughts and feelings, and that reality cannot be understood without taking these impulses into account. The way in which certain international relationships and the like are discussed today has been confused by these Ahrimanic spirits, who have been defeated by the spirit of Michael.

I have often mentioned that we can say that we have been in the so-called Michaelic Age since the end of the 1970s. Michael can be seen as the Zeitgeist, which has replaced Gabriel as the Zeitgeist. This means a great deal: Michael as the spirit of the age! The spirits of the age that were present in earlier centuries worked differently than this spirit of the age. The other spirits of the age that influenced the development of humanity in earlier centuries did so more or less in the subconscious. The task of the Michaelic Zeitgeist, which has been working in human affairs since the last third of the nineteenth century, is this: to release more and more in human consciousness itself that which is to take place in the evolution of the earth. This Michaelic Zeitgeist has actually descended and is working on the physical plane of the earth.

There is something connected with all this for our time that is extremely easy to misunderstand. Ours is a very, very ambivalent time. If you describe it so superficially, you could easily call our time merely materialistic. But that is not all; the matter is much more complicated. On the whole, one can say that these more recent times are, in their fundamental character, extraordinarily spiritual, extraordinarily spiritual indeed. And there have never been more spiritual concepts and ideas than those that have been brought to the surface by modern science in the development of humanity. But these concepts, if I may express myself in this way, are abstract. In themselves, in their substance, they are thoroughly spiritual; but they are not suited, as they appear, if they are not properly treated, to express spiritual realities. These concepts of natural science, which are being instilled into all education today, are a very double-edged sword, if I may use this paradoxical simile. They can be used as they are applied by academic science today. In that case they are spiritual, but only in so far as they are applied to the external material world; their spirituality is denied. But these scientific concepts can also be applied in such a way that they serve as material for meditation, that one meditates on them. Then they will most surely lead into the spiritual world. If those who today have a scientific world-picture would not be too lazy to apply their concepts in meditation, then these people with a scientific world-picture would very soon enter into spiritual science. It is not the content of the scientific concepts that is at fault, but the way they are treated. The concepts are subtle and intimate, but people apply them in a materialistic sense. It is not so easy to make this clear in all its details, but we must communicate with each other; therefore we must let many such truths approach us only by reflection, as it were.

Thus people live in concepts, in ideas that are thin, that are, I might say, pure distilled spirit, so that one needs only to apply a strong force to arrive at spiritual science; and these concepts are the ones that are to enter the human development precisely through the Michaelic Age. But they are also the ones who are most confused by the indicated, one can already say, from heaven to earth pushed, in heaven overcome ahrimanic spirits of obstacles. They arise in so many areas where man today believes he is thinking and reasoning quite correctly, but where he is exposed to the confusion of these spirits to a high degree.

It is precisely when considering such a matter that it becomes clear how development actually takes place, let us first stay with humanity. We must bring before our soul a significant law of development, which we have also to consider from other points of view. It is, of course, an extremely superficial way of looking at things to think that events in historical life simply arise from one another in such a way that what happens in 1918 is a consequence of 1917, 1916 and so on. That is a superficial way of looking at it. Things happen quite differently; they happen in such a way that what has happened in the spiritual realm continues to have an effect in the following periods, but in a certain way. You can take any year, let us say for example 1879. Then something happens in 1880 that is determined by the fact that what happened in 1878 is repeated retrogressively. In 1881, in a certain respect, what happened in 1877 is repeated retrogressively, and so on. One can start from any point in the development of humanity, as contradictory as this may seem; one will always find that earlier annual cycles show up in later ones as important impulses. One can therefore expect that, especially in an important period of time, this law will also intervene in the development of humanity with particular clarity and importance.

I have often hinted at this, and have often spoken before these catastrophic events of the important period of 1879, and that it is only the effect of what has been taking place in the spiritual world since the forties. If we now apply this law, which I have just mentioned, we can say the following: 1879 is an important period of time; certain spirits were pushed down who had previously worked in the spiritual world as spirits of hindrance, and from then on worked here on the physical plane among people in a hindering and confusing way. What happened in 1879 is, so to speak, the conclusion of an earlier event that began between 1841 and 1844 and has been taking effect over the decades. If we now take the year 1841, we have the period of struggle in the spiritual world from 1841 to 1879. Those entities, which are under the rule of the spirit, who is called Michael – one could also describe him with another name – they prepared themselves in 1841 to take up the strong, intensive fight in the spiritual world, which then found its conclusion for the spiritual world in 1879. It lasted for thirty-eight years. Now I said: That which happens retrogressively has a retroactive effect in the following period. — Now continue calculating from 1879 for another thirty-eight years: 1917. Just as in 1880 what happened in 1878 repeats itself, and in 1881 what happened in 1877, so in a certain way what took place in the spiritual world in 1841 is repeated in the physical world in 1917 as one of the most important struggles. It is indeed the case that the year 1879 marks a turning point, which shows very energetic impulses forward and backward in the observation. And in a certain way, on the physical plane of 1917, 1918, those things are now repeating themselves that had to take place in the spiritual world in the forties, and which can be described as a struggle of normal, forward-driving spirits against certain spirits of obstruction. This is not a calculation that I have only just made today; rather, many of you know that these events have always been referred to, and that from the point of view of these events, the year 1917 must be seen as an important starting point for subsequent events.

Of course, things must not be viewed in such a way that one says: Well, we have experienced the year 1917. Certainly, one has experienced it; but what the events actually were that took place in that year, only a few people have experienced, since few people are inclined to evaluate them in their waking consciousness. That is what it is all about.

Now, through all these things I wanted to point out that we are indeed living in an important moment in the evolution of humanity, and that it is necessary to take some things more seriously at this point in time than they are taken by the present humanity in its masses. I have already pointed out how particularly necessary it is not to ignore the normal spiritual impulses in our time. As this newer time has developed, what has actually become predominant in it? What has really gained influence in this newer time? What is radiated, I might say, into the whole of general education? Basically, only that which has grown on the coarsest field of the scientific world view. But this coarsest field of the scientific world view has only the power to grasp the dead, the inanimate, never the living, which would be so infinitely necessary in this scientific age. Even today, people still do not want to see the connection between such things and general world events. They do not want to see that the more humanity endeavors to develop only concepts that relate to the dead, they are also destroying social and community life from within. It is necessary to bring scientific concepts into flux and to enliven them in such a way that they can actually be applied to human coexistence, that they are, so to speak, suitable for explaining human coexistence.

The course of development has been this way in these newer, in these most recent times: in what has been accepted as actual science, only those concepts have been formed with which one can comprehend external, dead nature. These concepts were quite unsuitable for grasping human life. But they wanted to use them to grasp human life. And so the official scientists applied these concepts to history, to social science, to social policy, and so on. But these concepts are not useful there, and so there is no useful concept for social life at all. As a result, the social life of the earth has become too much for people to handle, has become what it has become over the past four years. People will have to learn to condense their concepts and also to vitalize them.

What the natural scientists themselves develop is certainly ingenious, useful, and conscientiously methodical, but only for the external world. Today, everyone works in their own field and does not extend the concepts that are developed in any field to the totality of the human world view. Take just one example, and you will immediately understand what I actually mean. The ordinary school physicist who today looks at the magnet needle pointing with one end to the north and with the other to the south, explains to his boys that this constant pointing of the magnet needle to the north and to the south comes from the earth's magnetism, that the earth is also a great magnet; and it would be ridiculous if this school physicist were to seek in the magnet needle itself the forces that cause the needle to point in these directions. He tries to explain it in terms of the properties of the earth; he seeks the cause outside in the cosmos. In this purely dead area, the scientific concepts are still of some use, and one or other of them may still be discovered. Therefore, it does not occur to anyone to say of the magnetic needle that it has the inherent power to always point in one direction. One assumes directional forces from the magnetic north and south poles of the earth. The biologist no longer does this. It does not occur to him to develop a similar concept. The biologist sees the chicken in which the egg is formed. It does not occur to him to ask the same question as the physicist asks about the magnetic needle. The biologist simply says: When the egg is formed in the hen, the cause of the egg formation lies in the hen. If he were to proceed as the physicist does with the magnet needle, he would say: Although the hen is the place where the egg is formed, the cosmic forces are involved in the same way as the cosmos is involved in the magnet needle when the egg is formed. I must go beyond the narrow confines of nature and take what is outside to help. In the chicken there is the place where the egg develops, but the forces come from the cosmos, just as they give direction to the magnet needle from the cosmos.

It is urgently necessary to develop such a concept and to implement it methodically. But in the eyes of the official science of biology it is foolish, fantastic, it is ridiculous, because it has completely lost its way into a blind alley of the dead. This official science cannot even apply the comprehensive concepts to such things, much less can it say anything about how people could live together politically or socially in the right way. How can one hope that something so necessary for humanity could come out of this mere natural scientific world view, namely a revival, a refreshing of these concepts? Especially in the important area of human life, this cannot be. Let us make this clear by looking at a concept that we want to grasp spiritually.

Even the mere observation of the human skeleton shows something extraordinarily important, something, I would say, magnificent. When you look at the human skeleton, you see the head, which is actually only placed on the rest of the trunk skeleton; it is a world of its own. The other part of the skeleton is formed quite differently. If we apply Goethe's theory of metamorphosis, we do indeed get the transformation of the trunk into the main skeleton, but the main skeleton is formed spherically, the head is a reflection of the whole sphere of the world. The other is formed more like a moon. This is something extraordinarily significant and indicates to us that if we want to gain fruitful insights into the human being from his form alone, we must look at something that is already indicated in the form. Our natural science is indeed magnificent, but it is illiterate when it comes to knowledge of the world. It proceeds as someone who does not read the pages of a book but writes on them: A is like this, B is like that — that is, not reading but merely describing the letters. But one must proceed to reading, one must understand, describe the forms of nature not merely as science does, but interpret them in their relationships, in their transitions. Then one comes from reading the forms of nature and natural phenomena to unraveling the meaning of the world. Of course, people who hear something like this today and who, with their thick heads, are completely stuck in illiteracy, find such a thing, when it is said, quite dreadful. Good examples could be given of how something is found to be dreadful that is so far-fetched from the human skeleton, but which can be extended to the whole human organism. Man is a dual nature, and this dual nature is already expressed in the fundamental contrast between the head and the rest of the organism.

If one now, through spiritual science, engages with these two aspects of the dual nature – one could specify further aspects, but that is not the point today – then one can already read something tremendously significant from the mere shape of the human being, if one really engages with it. From a spiritual scientific point of view, it can be seen that this human head undergoes a development from birth through physical life on earth, which now differs from the development of the rest of the organism just as the head already differs in form from the rest of the organism. It is very interesting to observe that this head develops three to four times faster than the rest of the organism. If you look at the rest of the organism, you can call it by a common name, in that it is mainly organized by the heart, so that you then get an opposite between the head organism and the heart organism. This heart organism really develops three to four times slower than the head organism. If we were only heads, we would be old people by the age of twenty-seven or twenty-eight, getting ready to die because the head develops so quickly. The rest of the organism develops four times more slowly, and so we live well into our seventies and eighties. But that does not change the fact that we actually have a head development and a heart development, that we carry these two natures within us. Our head development is also usually fully completed by the age of twenty-eight; the head no longer develops. What then develops is the rest of the organism. It also sends the developmental rays into the head of its own accord. If you are able to observe the shape, the characteristic development of the shape, you could come across confirmation even from external things, even if you cannot come across the thing itself. However, you have to have spiritual knowledge to come across this. But look, who has not looked at a small child and said to themselves when they see it again later: This child only later became so similar to so and so. — This is connected with the fact that the forces of heredity are actually in the rest of the organism. The head is formed entirely out of the cosmos; and only when the forces of heredity work out of the rest of the organism, which happens more slowly, does the physiognomy of the head also resemble the rest of the organism. This is just one example of how external facts can confirm what spiritual science finds. It is important to note that the head develops much faster than the rest of the organism.

You see, knowing this was not so important in the early days when people were more unfree, more directed. In those days, the good spiritual powers took care of things. They effectively established harmony between the pace of head development and the pace of the rest of development. Now the time is coming when people themselves must ensure that such things are harmonized. Therefore, people must be able to understand such things correctly, must be able to deal with them, and they sin against development if they cannot do so. And we have an important area of human life where these things are terribly sinned against. This sin is sporadically expressed today because we have been in it since the last third of the 19th century. It will be expressed in a terrible way if people cannot understand the spiritual impulses. Today they initially express themselves in the following way: No consideration is given to the fact that if a person is to develop normally, something must be given to him that takes into account the fact that his brain development is three to four times faster than that of the rest of the organism. And one area in which this is particularly damaging is that of education and teaching, for the following reasons: Under the influence of the scientific world view, concepts have been developed that have gradually become mere concepts for the development of the head, that do not contribute to the rest of the development, concepts that are acquired at the same pace as the head develops, that cannot be absorbed at the same pace as the rest of the organism develops.

This means an extraordinary amount. Time has gradually developed louder ideas that occupy the head, leaving the heart cool and empty. They come sporadically today, as I said, but the things will increasingly take hold. You can do the test if you can observe life. Because of the dichotomy of the way the head and heart develop, the human being depends on not just developing intellectually in his youth. In youth, the head is the main focus because the other aspects develop more slowly. If we wanted to educate people for the rest of their lives as well as for the head, we would have to keep them in school their whole lives. We can only address the head in school education. But today the head is treated in such a way that it cannot give anything back to the rest of the organism in spiritual and soul terms. The rest of the organism does, of course, give its inherited impulses to the head throughout life, otherwise we would die at twenty-seven, because the head is predisposed to do so. But in return, the head should also give what is cultivated in it. You can see for yourself that today's education does not do this. To prove it, ask yourself: Is it not true that people who receive a school education today only remember what they feel in later life? — Most of the time they do not even do that, but are happy to be able to quickly forget everything. This only means that the rest of the organism observes the formation of the head. If the rest of the organism received from the head the life essence it needs, then one would not only remember in terms of memory, but one would look back on what one's teacher gave one, as on a paradise, to which one thinks back with heartfelt contentment and attachment every hour in later life, into which one plunges again and again and in which one has a source of rejuvenation. It would be a source of rejuvenation if it included education of the heart, not just of the head. Then, throughout his or her life, a person would have something from childhood teaching, from school, for the rest of the organism, which develops four times more slowly, and this would also have an effect on the organism. Today it is only just beginning, and it will get worse and worse. People will become prematurely aged because they will only remember what they have absorbed into their heads, and what has meaning only up to the age of twenty-seven. After that, it remains as useless, remembered memory; and the person ages. He ages inwardly, spiritually, early on, because the formation of the head is not suited to overflow into the four times slower development of the heart.

These things must be taken into account. But if they are to be taken into account, then our school education must become a totally different one, then it must have living concepts instead of the dead concepts that prevail everywhere today. When it comes to a Kant-Laplacean theory, people will always remember it in such a way that they grow old. What is real: the spiritual and soul starting point of our universe, from which the physical has only developed, will, if it is properly incorporated into the teaching material, be a lifelong source of rejuvenation. And it is possible to shape the subject matter, not just by using a methodical approach, but by completely reworking it in the anthroposophical sense, so that throughout one's entire life, there is something that one can recall not just in thought, but that is a lifelong source of continuous rejuvenation. We must consciously work to ensure that people are not old when they are barely fifty years old, but that they can still draw inwardly, spiritually, from what they have taken in during their youth; that they can have a source of refreshment, a refreshing drink from what they have taken in as a child. But then it must be given in such a way that it is not only suitable for the development of the head, but that it is suitable for the development of the whole human organism, which proceeds three to four times more slowly than the development of the head.

To understand such things means to bring to life what are dead concepts for the natural scientist and therefore also for our general education. Do not underestimate the great social significance of what is said here. You might think that this is only important where science in the narrower sense is effective. That is not true. Science has an effect on all of today's education, on the whole breadth of today's human development. These scientific concepts extend even into the Sunday newspapers; and even those who only absorb everything that constitutes their faith today, the real and true faith, from their Sunday newspaper, which they pretend to have towards their church or their office, are infected by science, which can only deliver dead matter, even if this dead matter may be considered in the most spiritual way. These things must be clearly seen through.

So you see: Anthroposophically oriented spiritual science is truly not just something that can satisfy subjective curiosity, but something that has to deeply affect our entire development in time. And again, this intervention in our development in time depends, for our consciousness, which can be trained in anthroposophy, on the recognition of what took place in human development from 1841 to 1879 and to 1917, both supersensibly and sensibly, above and on the physical plane. These things cannot be taken seriously enough. For much, very much, has not been taken seriously in recent times. And the recovery of humanity will have to consist in people again being willing to accept perceptions, ideas, feelings about world development. Just reflect on these things!

If you look back over the past few decades, what has the world's ruling class, with the exception of a few individuals, actually done in terms of world views, major world views? At most, it has allowed natural scientific concepts to be popularized in some way, and has used these natural scientific concepts, which it has allowed to be popularized, to demonstrate all kinds of illustrative things using the means of modern times. If you could somehow announce that something from the natural sciences would be demonstrated with slides, you would attract a great deal of attention and popularity. What has the leading social class actually done with questions of world view in modern times? People were very interested if someone could tell what they experienced as a North Pole traveler or as a Brazilian explorer. It is not to be criticized that one is interested in this. When someone talks about the fact that he has somehow been able to unravel the secrets of the egg germ of the May beetle, one has felt the necessity of listening to such lectures as a well-educated bourgeois of modern times, even if one has dozed off after five minutes, unless a slide has awakened one. But where is the real will to elevate the human idea to a worldview? Where it was present, and it is very characteristic, and everyone is actually forced to reflect on it today, where have there been the most lively worldview debates, the most lively interests in worldview questions for decades? There, where the Social Democrats had their meetings. There, worldviews were formed. This is only unknown in other social classes because they guard against really getting to know human life as much as possible.

But what kind of worldview do the Social Democrats teach? One that only works with the same concepts that are enshrined in the machines; a worldview that only develops views of the world in the mechanical sense: historical materialism, materialist conception of history, materialist conception of human coexistence. You can read about these concepts in every socialist magazine. Most people don't do that, but it would be quite useful to get informed. Those people who have been pushed into the machines, who have nothing to do from morning till night but work, and who, when they come away from the machines in the evening, have to deal with a social institution that is actually a copy of the machine, they have a world view that sees the world as if it were a machine. They have developed a world view that takes no account of individuality and organizes everything around the balancing concept of the dead. There is a very good saying: Death makes everything equal; but one could also say: A worldview that only deals with the mechanical, the dead, also makes everything equal, extinguishes all individual existence, all life. — So all individual existence, all life would be extinguished by the worldview that takes its ideal from the machine. As long as the matter was not serious, one allowed these things to befall one while dreaming, while sleeping, and one behaved in such a way that one rejected all questions of world view and gradually lost touch with all the impulses that can permeate human community life, human educational life in an understanding way. And basically, in more recent times, work has only been done in matters of world view where mechanical concepts were used. Even science, after all, only produced mechanical concepts. If you take Theodor Ziehen's book, which is a model for modern science, and read the final chapters, you will see that he is also one of those who say that natural science cannot come up with concepts that ethics, morality and aesthetics provide; but afterwards concepts are developed which state that everything that is not natural science is only dreamed up. Between the lines, everything that is not natural science is defamed. At the end, Theodor Ziehen says graciously: Concepts such as freedom, ethics, morality and so on must come from other fields; only the concept of responsibility should actually be rejected by real science. Man cannot be responsible any more than a flower can be blamed for its ugliness. — From a scientific point of view, this is absolutely correct if you are one-sidedly grounded in natural science, if you apply mere concepts of the dead. But then you are applying concepts that do not even come to the living, and certainly not to the I.

It is interesting to see how Theodor Ziehen talks about the I. In these lectures, which were written down and then printed so that they capture the tone of the lecture, he says about the I: “Gentlemen, it is a complicated concept, the I; when you think about what you actually think when you hear the little word ‘I’, what do you come up with?

you come? First of all, you think of your corporeality. Then you think of your family relationships. Then you think of your property relationships. Then you think of your name and title - he leaves out the medals - then... well, you think of nothing but such things. And what some psychologists have developed, he says, is just a fiction. Yes, the natural scientist, when speaking about the ego, can also come to nothing but what no human being actually thinks about when they seriously consider the matter, when they consider the ego. But the matter is serious, in that the concepts that have been developed out of the dead must also lead to the killing, the destruction, and the devastation of life. A theory that has been made out of the dead machine as a social world-view theory has a destructive rather than a constructive effect when it is introduced into life. Humanity has not decided to grasp this; therefore, it must experience it in the most extreme way. For what has happened? In the area where sources of tremendous future impulses will once arise, in the East, the theory of the dead, the continuation of the mechanistic world view in social views, in Leninism and Trotskyism, is having a destructive effect.

Consider the matter only very seriously. He who recognizes only the dead, and in man also recognizes only the dead, may he be as great a scholar as Theodor Ziehen, when he speaks about the ego, about responsibility, as Theodor Ziehen does, then his true social interpreter is not he himself — who does not dare to do so — but Lenin and Trotsky are the ones who draw the right conclusion for human society. What Lenin and Trotsky carry out are the consequences of that which is already cultivated by the purely scientific world view. But because this scientific world view makes compromises with that which is not the consequence of this world view, only because of this does it, precisely because it does not draw the conclusion, become not Leninism and Trotskyism.

It is also important, however, that things be taken in the sense of reality. What is not true has an objective effect. Thoughts are realities, not mere concepts. You cannot just say: Even if no one knows about a lie, it still works as a power. That is true, but something else is also true: If a lie exists that is not recognized as a lie, that does not change its effect; it works in the real world as a lie. And no matter how well it is meant, it still works as a lie.

There are already works today - I may have mentioned them here already - which treat the question of Christ Jesus from the standpoint of the correct present-day natural science. Very interesting books, because they proceed uncompromisingly. Above all, a Danish book. There are also others who really express what the present-day psychologist, the present-day psychiatrist, who thinks scientifically, must think about Christ Jesus. What does Christ Jesus become? He becomes an epileptic, a pathological person, a person with a morbid disposition. And the Gospels are interpreted in such a way that one sees in every chapter: they are case histories. Of course, all this is nonsense; but to say that it is nonsense, today only the one has the right to do so who sees through the matter spiritually. The one who accepts today's scientific psychology and psychiatry, from his point of view, this Christ teaching is the right one, because it draws the right conclusion there. And a person who speaks as a modern psychiatrist is still a better person, a truer, a more honest person than the one who accepts today's psychiatry and yet thinks differently about Christ, in the sense of those pastors or priests who also accept science in its entirety and yet make compromises.

A lie has an effect, however piously it is dressed up, for it is a real power. Above all, what is needed today is not to cover up life with compromises, but to face squarely what needs to be faced from certain presuppositions. If today's psychiatrist does not want to see Christ as an epileptic, as a lunatic, which according to today's psychiatry he would be, then he must give up psychiatry as it is developed today; then he must place himself on the ground of spiritual science. If people today were able to place themselves squarely on the foundations of that which can be known, then we would, with what can be known, have the right impulses for what must continue to work.

Recently, a note was slipped into my hand about a book that I was already familiar with, which had, in any case, caused the horror of the lady – because it was probably a lady. The note tells me what Alexander Moszkowski has written. I don't have the book here, but you can see from the slip what the book is about: “Anyone who has ever sat on the benches of a grammar school will find the hours unforgettable when, in Plato, he ‘enjoyed’ the conversations between Socrates and his friends, unforgettable because of the incredible boredom that emanates from these conversations. And one might remember that one actually found the conversations of Socrates heartily stupid; but of course one did not dare to express this view, because after all the man in question was Socrates, the “Greek philosopher”. The book “Sokrates der Idiot” (Socrates the Idiot) by Alexander Moszkowski (Verlag Dr. Eysler & Co. Berlin) does away with this unjustified overestimation of the good Athenian. In this small, entertainingly written work, the polymath Moszkowski undertakes nothing less than to strip Socrates of his philosophical dignity almost completely. The title “Socrates – the Idiot” is meant literally. One would not be mistaken in assuming that the book will still be the subject of scholarly debate.

Of course, today's compromisers will say: Well, we have learned enough that Socrates is a great man, and not an idiot; now Moszkowski comes along and says such a thing! But today it is necessary to have a completely different idea about such a thing. Those who know Moszkowski are aware that he stands on the ground of the scientific world view in the fullest sense of the word, right up to the quantum theory, and that he is therefore on the outermost wing of today's scientific world view. And it must be said that this Moszkowski is a much more honest man than the others, who also believe that they stand on the standpoint of the natural-scientific world-view and yet do not think that they should regard Socrates as a fool who has nothing to say on the concepts important for the world-view; who nevertheless make compromises, depict Socrates as a great man.

The fact is that today things cannot be put right for the simple reason that people do not have the sense of truth to face up to the consequences uncompromisingly in every respect. And anyone who wants to accept Socrates today must not accept the conditions that Moszkowski sets.

But that is difficult today, has been difficult for three to four centuries. Therefore, the matter was left alone until it had developed into what it has become in the last three to four years. Things must be approached at their soul-spiritual core, where their truly deeper impulses lie. It must be faced, which is particularly necessary today, to face the fact that truth and the sense of truth must enter into the souls of human beings! Then the things that are brought into the light of this sense of truth, that are illuminated by the light of this sense of truth, will be able to show their true face. Then one will be compelled to come to spiritual science simply because one sees the true face of things. For the present speaks a lot and speaks urgently, and things can be learned, such as how educational issues and questions of teaching must be studied by spiritual science today. Just as the question of the different pace of head and heart education is important for teaching and education, so there are many questions that are fundamental, important and significant for social life, for historical life, for legal life. We just have to get out of what we have dug ourselves into, out of the terrible belief in authority regarding what the scientific world view alone provides. This is necessary for our time. What the scientific world view calls 'real' provides concepts that can never reach into the realm of human coexistence. Humanity lives under this error today. If you look at things more deeply, you can see this.

That is what I wanted to say to you today. Now, let each one of you draw the conclusion from this that it is important to open our eyes and to illuminate things with the light that we can find from the light of spiritual science itself.

Yesterday I spoke about how our development appears to the Oriental. In many respects, the Oriental sees precisely what is compromising and inconsistent with his naive, intuitive spiritual faculty. And right now there are critical views among outstanding Orientals that are significant and interesting to follow. More and more views are emerging in the Asian East that the Orient must take the further development of humanity into its own hands. These views could be undone if there were more sense for what is proclaimed here as spiritual science! But then this sense must also be a living one; one must not only want to have something interesting in spiritual science, from which one prepares an inner soul voluptuousness, but one must want to have something that permeates one's whole life. And one must be able to see that it is only through the insights of spiritual science that social, moral and legal concepts can truly be grasped. What humanity has conceived under the influence of the scientific world view over the decades has not grown with the spirit that reigns in reality. No, it is at best comparable to those views that today educate people who want to spiritually kill the whole world because they only take their concepts from the world of the dead. Future times, when people will think more objectively about these things again, when the passions that so often guide and direct judgments today will have died down, future times – I am fully convinced that it can be so — will say: One of the most important characteristics of the period around 1917 was that the Weltanschhauung, which is only intended for the head and actually drives people into old age, has become a school-like Weltanschhauung. In the future, perhaps in a distant future, it will be called Wilsonism, in reference to the great schoolmaster from whom a large part of humanity wants to have a socio-political worldview impressed upon them. It is no mere accident that mere school-knowledge, which has nothing to do with the spiritual, has now become one of the most important political factors in the form of Wilsonism. This is an important and tremendously significant symptom of our time. It is just not possible to talk about these things today in a really thorough and comprehensive way that takes everything into account. But from my present allusions you will have gathered how important it actually is to try to understand these things thoroughly, how infinitely important it is to face up to these things not only out of affect, out of emotion, but out of knowledge.

I may have mentioned it here before, but I mention it again because it is important: now it is not difficult to speak out against Wilson within Central Europe; but I can point out how, in a cycle that was held long before these events, when the whole world, including Central Europe, still admired Wilson, I characterized him exactly the same way as I do now. The point is that one approaches the impulses that dominate the present time, which also dominate the present time as errors, from much deeper sources. In our anthroposophical field, our friends had the opportunity to see how, long before there was any external compulsion to see things in the right light, the right thing was pointed out again and again. May these things be better understood in the future than we have decided to understand them in the past! And I would especially urge you to bear this in mind: much of what is coming to light in the field of our anthroposophical science is infinitely better understood than we have so far chosen to understand it. It can penetrate even deeper into the hearts and souls of human beings and be awakened to a more intense life than has happened so far. May it happen! For what happens through it will already be connected with much that can truly be done, not to bring about disaster, but for the good of the future development of humanity, that can be done to make good much that has been neglected and that might perhaps be neglected further if one only listens to that which can be gained outside of spiritual science. Among our friends, too, many have a double bookkeeping of their lives. They have one in anthroposophical studies and books, for the private nourishment of their hearts and souls. The other bookkeeping is for their life outside, where they rely solely on the authority of the natural sciences. Often one does not realize that this is the case; but it is good to be a little conscientious in consulting with one's soul about these things, so that there may be harmony between these two accounts.

Man's life can only be administered in one sense. The spirit must also penetrate the scientific world view. And religious life must also be imbued with the light that can be gained from spiritual science. Take such things as were said and meant here today, and which seemingly lead the considerations of time up to supersensible heights, as they can be grasped in your presentations. Then you will see that anthroposophical education is not only education of the head, that it can also educate the heart for humanity. It is already education of the heart. It already serves all humanity, not just the humanity that might actually die at twenty-seven. It already serves to make people courageous and capable throughout their entire life. Education that fails to take into account the different pace of the development of head and heart will make him old, nervous, disharmonious and torn. Look at life, you will find this confirmed, because life can be a great teacher with regard to the confirmation of what anthroposophically oriented spiritual science brings down from the spiritual heights. Take everything that has been said, especially when it is spoken from such points of view as today, as spoken to your hearts, my dear friends, for the education of our hearts by the spirit of the world; and hold together that which should be the bond that links us together as members of our movement. Let us work together and plan to continue working, each in our own place and to the best of our ability.

I have already pointed out that one hears time and again an objection to the study of spiritual truths. This objection, incidentally, is immediately dismissed as arising from the extreme laziness of the human soul. It is the objection of those who say: I do not reject the idea that man, after passing through the gate of death, enters another, a spiritual world; but what this spiritual world is like, what the state of this spiritual world is, I will wait and see! Here on this earth one must attend to one's material duties, and then one will see what happens in another world when one is transported to that other world. It cannot be denied that this objection is very convenient. However, to examine it carefully is the duty of anyone who is interested in spiritual-scientific truths, because such examination can confirm their belief in the necessity of really dealing with spiritual-scientific truths. In order to lay this examination before you, I would like to say, let us today, from a certain point of view, once again visualize the relationships that exist between human life here and human life that flows between death and a new birth.

Let us be clear about the fact that man, while he walks through life here in the physical body, only really takes in part of what is connected with his life into ordinary consciousness, because things are constantly happening that are connected with our life, but which do not pass by our life so that we can bring them clearly and distinctly to our ordinary consciousness. Sometimes we become half aware of the facts, but not of their full significance for us in our everyday lives. Think about your day's work in the evening, and above all think about the places you have entered and the people you have encountered there. All of this has great significance for you, because your immediate surroundings are reflected in your soul. And of the many things that are reflected in the soul, very few come to our clear consciousness in everyday life. There is a great difference, after all, between, let us say, having been near the Stuttgart train station at nine o'clock this morning and having been out in the forest, because in both cases something quite different has been reflected in your soul; something quite different lives in your soul in both cases. We usually do not realize that this has a profound significance. Only from, I would say, quiet hints of life can we often deduce the meaning of such things. Take the following, for instance. You can see it – not in this case, of course, but in other cases – if you pay a little attention to life. Suppose you came here this evening. Someone in the first row would have reason to leave the room before I finish speaking; he gets up, moves down the aisle and leaves. Someone in the third row has seen him, but, at least I assume so, this person in the third row has listened carefully – which also happens, doesn't it – and he has only half let this personality, who has just left, pass by in his usual consciousness. He will be able to notice that he perhaps dreams very little of what I have spoken here. For if one could take a statistic on the subject, those of the honored listeners who dream a great deal about what has been said here would probably not be all that numerous. But you will easily be able to see – perhaps not from this example, but from a similar one – that you dream about the one who stood up and went out. That is to say, you will be able to observe in numerous cases in life that you draw on those things in your sleeping consciousness that fleetingly pass by your consciousness during the day.

This is why people know so little of what they have dreamt. For most of what is dreamt is of such a nature that it passes by fairly unnoticed during the day. Only the things that are clearly grasped by the consciousness are rarely dreamt of. Dreams only come when they are connected with certain sensations, certain feelings, which again are not clearly and distinctly brought to consciousness. And when one wakes up one remembers so little of the dreams, because in the previous life one paid little attention to what one dreamt. This is also connected with the limited ability to remember dreams. In short, what I want to say is this: countless things rush by in a person's life that only very fleetingly enter into consciousness, but that have a great significance for the human soul, even if they remain in the unconscious or subconscious. Everything that runs, as it were, between the lines of life has great significance at first, when the human being has passed through the gate of death.

We have often had to describe this time, which the human being first spends between death and a new birth, from the most diverse points of view. Thus one thing always blends into another, and only by choosing the most diverse points of view can one arrive at a certain completeness in this field. Everything that passes unnoticed by the ordinary consciousness is then revealed when the human being has passed through the gate of death. And I would call what the human being experiences first over a long period of time the unrolling of images. What the person goes through is essentially a reliving of experiences of the imaginative consciousness. A great, great number of images are unrolled over scenes from life that we have been very little aware of. And of that which we have become aware of here, that which has also been little touched by consciousness here is unrolled. The other, which was clear consciousness here, occurs more as memory after death, like memory images, like remembrance; but what has been little noticed here unrolls as in present images.

Today it is particularly important to me to point out that the first third of life between death and a new birth is essentially concerned with this unrolling of images, essentially with a life in imaginations. We can help these imaginations by establishing a connection between us, who have remained here, and those who, as karmically connected to us, have gone through the Gate of Death. Then comes the second third, in which this spiritual and soul life is more fully inspired. It is here that a person realizes the significance of the images he first experienced in the context of the whole world, and how these images connect him to the world. Everything a person experiences is significant in the context of the world. One must not believe that it is unimportant to have once met a person, whom one may have paid little attention to, to have been close to them. It is revealed in images, and what it means in the whole of world events comes to revelation in inspirations in the second third of life between death and a new birth.

In the last third, life is mainly one of intuitions. There the human being has to empathize with what is in his spiritual and mental environment. There the human being lives as if submerged with his consciousness in what is in his spiritual and mental environment. And it is precisely in this last third, through this submersion, that he prepares for the submersion in the physical body after birth or conception. The intuitions in the last third of life between death and a new birth are the introduction of that intuition, which is then of course subconscious or unconscious, which consists of the fact that the human being submerges into the body that is handed down to him in the hereditary stream of parents, grandparents and so on. And something remains for the person when he has now passed from the spiritual and soul world into the physical world. If you consider this, bear in mind that the human being actually lives through long periods in spiritual and soul intuitions, is accustomed to living in such, so he will still want to hold on to this habit when he has entered into the physical body. And indeed he does. For what then is the main endeavour of the soul during the first seven years of life until the change of teeth? You can look it up in the booklet 'The Education of the Child from the Point of View of Spiritual Science'. I have said: the desire to imitate. The child always tries to do what is being done in its surroundings; it does not start from its own intentions; it puts itself in the actions of those who live in its surroundings and imitates them. This is the echo of the intuitions in the last third of the life between death and a new birth. We are therefore born as imitative beings because we translate into physical life what we have done for a long time in a spiritual-soul way in the other world. And one understands how man grows into this physical life by turning one's gaze back to what man has become accustomed to doing in the spiritual world.

Here you see a thought from spiritual science presented to you that is of a kind that many will have to come in the coming centuries and millennia for human spiritual life. These thoughts will indeed have to change much, much from what has occupied people spiritually until now. Consider that it has become customary in recent centuries, when thinking about the question of immortality, to think mainly about what comes after death. One always thinks: Can man hold that which he develops in physical life beyond death? — This is important to people above all else. This question of immortality is certainly important, but it will take on a different complexion if we consider, I might say, the other half of the question of immortality, if we are not interested in what follows death and what emerges as a consequence of life here on earth but when one will ask: how does what we experience here in the physical body connect with what we have experienced before? For the life we have experienced before, our life here is the hereafter. It is mainly in this direction that thought will be received on this side. People will realize that they can only understand life on earth if they see it as a continuation of the spiritual life from which they have come. They will start to take an interest again in that life that preceded earthly life. It can be said that, with the exception of the last third of the 19th century, people were still somewhat interested in the question of immortality in spiritual life, but they were only interested in the question of immortality insofar as spiritual life in immortality is a continuation of earthly life. The philosophers did it that way, but these philosophers were basically, despite their claim to be doing unprejudiced science, in many respects miserable people who, while they believed they were doing unprejudiced science, did nothing more than continue the prejudices that arose from certain currents. Consider that at the time of Origen, the Church condemned the pre-existence of the soul, that it condemned Origen because he taught this pre-existence, so that the Church was in a certain dilemma: there was Origen, the greatest of the Church Fathers, and it could not be denied that Origen taught pre-existence. But that is forbidden in the church. So there was a great dilemma. Throughout the Middle Ages, people were accustomed not to teach about pre-existence. The professors of philosophy continued this well, and so did the writers of philosophy, but they believed that they were thinking without preconditions. They did the same in other questions, in questions for which I have already given examples here. Now it must be realized above all that the direction of thought, the direction of human contemplation, must undergo a serious change through spiritual science. This life on earth will only appear in its true value when one becomes conscious that it is a continuation of a spiritual life. And it can only be understood if it is grasped as such. Then, too, one will arrive at a more sound judgment on the other side of the question when one looks at it in this light. When one realizes more clearly that this life on earth has a significance for the life in the beyond, that man in the beyond strives to come here to earth to have this life on earth because he needs it, then one will ask about the value of this life on earth much more from just such a premise than one has done so far.

But one thing in particular will be able to point out to you how important it is to ask about the value of this earthly life. Two things are often not very clearly distinguished from each other, namely: Man thinks - and: Man has thoughts. But the two things are really very different from each other. Thinking is a power that man has, an activity; and this activity first leads to thoughts. Now, we bring the activity of thinking, this power that lives in thinking, into this earthly life from the time between death and a new birth. We apply this power of thinking to external perceptions through the senses and think about the surroundings that we have here. But these things in our surroundings have no significance for the time between death and a new birth, because there they are nothing. They are only here for the senses. Therefore, the thoughts we have here about the things that are spread out before our senses have no significance for life after death; but it does have a significance for life after death that we feed the power of thought at all, because this power of thought remains with us for the whole of life between death and a new birth. The thoughts that we accept from sensory perceptions are of no use to us after death. They only serve as clues to remember the self during the life between birth and death.

Imagine two people. One of them is not at all interested in what can be learned about life in the spiritual worlds through something like spiritual science. He only thinks about what the senses present and what ordinary science teaches; but that is nothing more than what the senses present. And he says: I will wait to see what the spiritual world is like before I penetrate it. From a certain point of view, they are, I might say, the less culpable in comparison with those who appeared in the 19th century and believed that they had to deny the existence of a spiritual world altogether, with all the power of science, according to the saying that the poet has such a person utter: “As surely as there is a God in heaven, I am an atheist!” — It was from such a frame of mind, after all, that 19th-century atheism was sometimes born, out of such “thoughtful soul-searching”. But let us take a person who simply does not engage in forming thoughts about the spiritual worlds. That would be one person. The other person engages in forming thoughts about the spiritual world. These are different thoughts from those that one takes in through the senses. It cannot be denied that they are different thoughts. This is already evident from the fact that the thoughts through which a spiritual world is not perceived are, in the opinion of most people living today, the clever thoughts, the real thoughts; the thoughts that spiritual science describes are the crazy, the fantastic, the crazy thoughts, and so on.

But let us take these two people. What situation are they in when they have passed through the gate of death? The person who has not absorbed any thoughts about the spiritual worlds here, who has not allowed thoughts about the spiritual worlds to pass through his soul, is, as a being of soul, in the same situation after death as someone who has a physical body but has nothing to eat and must starve. For the thoughts we think here about the spiritual worlds are the nourishment for one of the most important powers that remain with us after death: for the power of thought. We have the power of thought just as we have the power of hunger here, but this power of hunger cannot be nourished at all between death and a new birth. Between death and a new birth we can have imagination, inspiration and intuition, but we cannot have thoughts as such. We have to acquire them here. We have to enter into the life between birth and death in order to acquire thoughts here. We live on these thoughts, which we have acquired here, the whole time between death and a new birth, and we starve for these thoughts if we do not have them. That is the difference. He who does not want to occupy himself with the spiritual worlds here on earth is doomed to become a spiritual starving person. And such a person, who is able to satisfy himself and thus live between death and a new birth, is the one I mentioned as the second one who occupies himself with thoughts such as we do here. If materialism were to become the only view held by people, then in the future, between death and a new birth, people would fall more and more prey to a spiritual famine. The result of this would be that they would enter the physical world stunted through the following incarnation. The spiritual world would wither away, and with the spiritual world the physical world would wither away in the future that humanity still has to go through during this earthly world. They have succeeded in making the saying “After us, the deluge” a certain attitude for unsuspecting humanity that does not know what is at stake. This saying, 'After us, the deluge', even if it is not done, lies at the bottom of the soul in a materialistic time. This saying has no meaning at all for those who know reality. For what humanity is doing at the present time, whether it wants to immerse souls in the spiritual worlds or not, is what lays the foundation for the future of development. The welfare of the Earth itself depends on mankind not giving up its thoughts about the spiritual worlds in the present. Those who live in the present should realize this more and more. For an enormous amount depends on the fact that the course of human development is understood spiritually.

We have tried to develop important concepts about the spiritual worlds, because ultimately the spiritual worlds do indeed extend into our physical world, and one cannot understand the physical world either without understanding the spiritual worlds. And we have developed the most diverse concepts. Now, a truly thinking person will come to realize that this spiritual-scientific thinking is particularly important for reality. You simply cannot understand the whole of reality if you only want to think scientifically, just as you cannot understand material existence if you only think scientifically and not spiritually. I will give you a very paradoxical and strange example of this.

I believe I emphasized here some time ago that about a year and a half ago a very significant thick book was published by an excellent contemporary natural scientist, Oscar Hertwig, a Haeckel student, “The Becoming of Organisms; a refutation of Darwin's theory of chance”. This is an excellent book that is right at the cutting edge of contemporary scientific research. And I have taken many opportunities recently to emphasize the significance and the leading ideas in it. For it is also a remarkable book from a cultural-historical point of view. You know that in 1869 Eduard von Hartmann appeared on the scene with his 'Philosophy of the Unconscious', at that time in the heyday of Darwinism, which had then found its materialistic interpretation. Eduard von Hartmann opposed it. Then the natural scientists cried out: Well, it is an amateur philosopher who talks about spirit and understands nothing about natural science! — The matter turned out as I have already described it several times. One day a book appeared about which even Haeckel's student Oskar Schmidt wrote: “There is someone who understands something about natural science. He gave Hartmann what for! We ourselves could not say it better; let him come to us, and we will welcome him as one of our own! — They have done a terrible job of advertising. A second edition became necessary. Then the author named himself: it was Eduard von Hartmann! That's when they stopped advertising it. It was high time that someone took a stand and showed people that those who speak of the spirit are no less intelligent than those who deny it. Eduard von Hartmann wrote several other works in which he pointed out the one-sidedness of Darwinism. He did not find much favor with it. But one can say: After calm, well-trained research, a man like Oscar Hertwig has come to think the way Eduard von Hartmann spoke as early as 1869. He even quotes him frequently in his work. And everything is structured in an exemplary way in this book, 'The Becoming of Organisms'. Here one can actually study a prime example of a matter that could grow out of the scientific method of the present day, and has grown out of it.

Now, a few weeks ago, the same man published a kind of sequel to this book: “In Defense of Social, Ethical and Political Darwinism.” It is hard to imagine a more stupid book than this one, which Oscar Hertwig allowed to follow his first epoch-making work. It is hard to imagine anything more inadequate, anything more tinny than this book. As you can see, in the field of our spiritual science, it is necessary to acquire a certain lack of authority, because if our dear friends, after I have praised the truly epoch-making book to the skies and will always do so, now buy the second book on the basis of authority and say to themselves, “So we have to see this as something great,” they will be very much mistaken. The purpose of spiritual science is to enable us to form judgments freely and to be ready in every direction and at every moment to face the phenomena that come our way. Even in the most esoteric spiritual-scientific endeavors, no credence in authority can be tolerated, otherwise the result will not be spiritual science but a caricature of it. What is the cause of what I have described? It arises from the fact that today one can be a great epoch-making natural scientist, that is, one can be in a position to develop everything concerning material events and their manifestations according to the methods of the 19th and 20th centuries; but as soon as one begins to reflect on what lies in the human sphere, what lives in man, how people live together socially, when they live together ethically and morally, when they want to develop politically, want to develop political ideas, at that moment, when one begins to think about those things in which the spiritual element plays a role, one can, despite being a brilliant natural scientist, be an absolutely stupid person, because natural science is of no use at all. And just such a literary example has emerged in our time to really substantiate this, which can be seen from spiritual science; to really present it in reality. For anyone reading this second book by Oscar Hertwig will notice that there is not a single thought about what relates to social, ethical or political life, as would be quite appropriate in the present, for the present is really not exactly rich in fruitful social, ethical and especially political ideas. But that also stems from the fact that purely scientific thinking has been completely overestimated. And here Oscar Hertwig has the best of intentions; he wants to move this scientific thinking away from social, ethical and political thinking. But since he has nothing at all about the latter, it is of no use for him to reject the former. This book contains the most curious intellectual somersaults. I will only point out one thing, always assuming that the first book I mentioned is an excellent one.

People do not notice it: Oscar Hertwig is an authority; our time does not believe in authority, but it falls for any authority that is officially presented to it. People are willing to be taught; some things do not even strike them. But in the second book, Oscar Hertwig wants to make it clear to people what has to be done to think scientifically. He can do it, but he does not understand what it is. After all, you can do it instinctively. The methods are great; you just need to be educated for it, you don't have to develop in your thoughts what you are doing. This is where Oscar Hertwig comes to the following strange conclusion. He talks about how one should actually conduct scientific research in order to recognize things in one's environment. He says: The great model for physical, chemical and biological thinking has been provided by astronomers, and it is important that people learn to think about physical, chemical and actual life phenomena in the same way that astronomers think about celestial phenomena. It is very suggestive to say: imitate the greatness of thinking in Kepler, in Copernicus, in Newton, in order to understand the phenomena that are around you! But just think about what is behind it! The phenomena of life, the physical, the chemical phenomena, the phenomena of life are all around us; the facts are very close to us and we encounter them all the time. And now we are to obtain science by directing ourselves to the facts that are as far removed as possible from us; thus, because we are as far removed as possible from the facts of celestial phenomena, we are to develop from them the knowledge of that which actually surrounds us. One cannot form a more insane thought than such a thing. But thousands upon thousands of people read past such madness and suspect nothing of the fact that such follies corrupt the whole thinking of the present time, that if it takes hold, it must make people more and more alienated from reality. And then one cannot see one's way into any social, ethical or political structure if one starts from such thinking and such sentences. It is one of the tasks of our spiritual science to see clearly through what is in the so-called spiritual life of the present day.

I said that we had to deal with pointing out the spiritual forces that do indeed extend into the ordinary physical world. And we have spoken again and again about the fact that the human being, with his life, stands in three currents of force, in the luciferic, in the ahrimanic and in the one that is actually appropriate for the development of humanity. I have often pointed out that one must not say: I avoid the Luciferic, I avoid the Ahrimanic – if one avoids it, one will only plunge into it all the more, but one must be clear about it, one must really study, get to know the human being's standing in these three currents. One must take the knowledge of Lucifer and Ahriman into life.

Now, much of the social and historical structure of humanity in the last centuries or millennia has been very much under Luciferic impulses that came from within man. One could cite many, many things that were under Luciferic impulses, but I will cite only one, in which everyone will immediately see the Luciferic.

Ambition and vanity play a major role in the way people position themselves on the various poles of their lives, the various points of view in life. Many a person would never have aspired to this or that position if the social structure had not been the cause of this vanity being stirred up in one direction or another. All this business about titles, ranks and orders is ultimately based on the Luciferic element. And just try to consider impartially how much of what people achieve in life is purely due to the fact that they aspired to these fishing rods of ambition, to these baits. Try to consider how people are placed, one above the other, one under the other; how social institutions take this ambition into account. Try to realize how this has built the social structure. In this field, Lucifer has played an extraordinarily important role.

Let us consider another phenomenon that is now beginning to be practiced and admired. And here, in the field of spiritual scientific work, is the place to consider such things in a proper and realistic way. If you pay attention to some of the various things that are now becoming popular in the present, you will find among them what are now called the “gifted examinations”. The purpose of these examinations is to single out the gifted from among the children and young people. There is a danger that these aptitude tests will lead to true idolatry. How are they done? You have trained psychologists who, although they understand nothing of the soul, understand psychology all the better; psychologists who are trained in the methods of the present and who are thus able to select the gifted from a series of young people or children, so that the right man can later be in the right place, of course. One baits now less, one believes, in the future with the ambition, with the vanity, but one makes gifted examinations. These gifted examinations refer to the speed of comprehension, to the memory. Senseless words are written down, and the one who can remember them faster has a better memory than the one who can remember them less quickly. Intelligence tests are made. A word, a second, a third word that have no connection are given, and then the students are asked to find a connection. So, for example, one writes: “robber” and “mirror” and says: Now think of something between robber and mirror. — One person now thinks: The robber sees himself in the mirror. The other thinks: I have a mirror in my room, a robber sneaks in and I see it in the mirror. The latter has thought more complicatedly and is therefore more gifted. Then the matter is made statistical and those who are most intelligent are selected; they are then taken as the right people to be placed in the right place.

You see, anyone who objects to this great achievement of the present day on the basis of the conditions that now prevail here is considered a very stupid fool who knows nothing about what it is all about.

Now, let us take a look at this whole matter. What exactly are we examining when we test people in this way? We are not examining anything that really has to do with their soul. We only have to consider one thing: that probably the most important people of the past, those who have achieved the greatest things, would have been considered untalented after such tests. Consider even Helmholtz, who is regarded as a celebrity by modern man; if he had been subjected to such a test of talent, he would certainly not have reached the position he later held. These tests of talent have nothing to do with the development of the soul abilities of the human individuality, but everything to do with the sum of the Ahrimanic forces within man. It is not the person who is tested, but the Ahrimanic forces within him. And so, just as one has previously reckoned with Luciferic forces, one now begins to count on Ahrimanic forces and to establish a social structure that is built purely on Ahrimanic forces. However, only those who really engage with spiritual scientific content and who want to see through the world spiritually will be able to see through such things. Because what I have told you now about the aptitude tests is presented by a large number of people and their journalistic followers as one of the most significant achievements of the present day, presented in such a way that the social structure of the future can be built on the basis of this examination. And the public, which does not believe in authority, this poor public, has no opportunity to reflect on what such a matter is actually about. It does not have the opportunity to form clear concepts about such a matter. But that is what matters.

If, after taking in some of the things we have on our minds today, you begin to form ideas about what needs to happen first for humanity, what needs to happen in terms of the spiritual development process, then you are asking the right questions. But then you will endeavor to grasp the human individualities in order to teach them what they should be interested in. You will not come to test the Ahrimanic abilities, because these Ahrimanic abilities will lead to humanity being treated entirely as a sum of machines. You only test the mind in the outer body. One tests the human being only to the extent that he is a machine when he is subjected to this aptitude test. And a social selection is created that only makes the best types of physical machines the leaders of humanity. Nowhere is there any reflection on what basically rests in the soul, and what can never come to the surface in such tests. But I do not blame anyone if they run after such things in an almost idolatrous way today, because someone who has not studied spiritual science at all can only do as they do and surrender to the judgment that it is the smartest thing to do in the present. But this gradually leads away from real human liveliness, from human reality. It leads into abstract areas, into that which is dead in human life and is dominated only by the spirituality of Ahriman. One must see through the full seriousness of such things, how people are drawn away from the real. And that is something that confronts one with particular intensity in the present: the drawing away of people from reality. For anyone who has no sense of spiritual reality will gradually lose their sense of ordinary external reality as well, the reality that surrounds them every day, if they are not forced by their profession or other things to pay attention to reality.

I will give you an example of this: something very cute happened the other day. An article by Fritz Mauthner, the critic of language, appeared in a very popular newspaper. In this article, Fritz Mauthner, who is an extraordinarily clever man, complains about a booklet that has appeared in the collection “From Nature and the Spiritual World” and that develops the astrological ideas that have emerged in a way that is entirely in line with current materialistic science – and in fact in the way a modern university professor does – as it is. At the end, the person in question develops the horoscope of Goethe and explains that it can be used to show how things went in Goethe's life. But actually, the good professor only makes fun of those who believe in horoscopes. He wants to show them as something that can be interpreted in different ways. Fritz Mauthner rants and raves through three columns of the “Berliner Tageblatt”. One could not understand why he was actually ranting. There was not the slightest reason to rant. He actually has the same opinion as the one who wrote the little book, both look at astrology from the same point of view. And very soon the Tageblatt also published a correction by the author, in which he says that he does not understand Mauthner. He did not explicitly say on every third line: I scold astrology —, but he actually has no more interest in astrology than Fritz Mauthner does; he fully agrees with him. The Berliner Tageblatt – newspapers are very clever – adds that it has no reason to take the author to task and accuse Fritz Mauthner of misunderstandings. Fritz Mauthner was in fact the theater critic of the Berliner Tageblatt for many years and now writes a kind of theater column for this newspaper.

For his part, Fritz Mauthner says that he also has nothing to say about this anti-criticism by the author. One was faced with the strange fact that two people actually agree with each other, but one lashes out at the other. Fritz Mauthner gets angry when he hears something about astrology, or when someone writes something about horoscopes. Otherwise it would be inconceivable that he would have written this article. He writes as though the other were the most terrible astrologer, who wanted to throw the validity of Goethe's horoscope in people's faces. So there you have an example of how two people fight each other, one voluntarily, Fritz Mauthner, the other out of necessity, because Fritz Mauthner attacked him first, two people between whom there is not the slightest difference. How can that be? Such a thing can only happen when two people have nothing to do with reality, which is itself narrowly defined, when both live out of something other than reality. The most glorious example of this is that people talk and talk today, and talk very cleverly – Fritz Mauthner is a very clever man – but there is nothing behind the talk. There is not the slightest reason to talk like that.

There you have an example of a completely logical construction of thoughts that have absolutely nothing to do with reality. This is what happens to thoughts that get out of the habit of having anything to do with spiritual reality, because then the thought gradually loses all its connections to reality. It is important to realize this. And that is also the terrible seriousness of the matter. For in the end it does not matter whether Fritz Mauthner and the Heidelberg professor are attacking each other and their words have no meaning at all because there is no reality behind them, or whether they are two politicians, one of whom speaks in America and the other in Europe, and who perhaps even speak in agreement, despite being totally different. If all people who talk like this are absolutely alien to reality, have nothing to do with what really lives in things, then this estrangement from reality will spread. It has spread. For the example I gave, of Fritz Mauthner and Professor Boll, is only a grotesque example. But it is everywhere present. That is how it is done today. And what does it lead to? It leads to conflict. It is relatively easy to be united when you deal with reality; but when you stand by reality, it leads to conflict. Little by little, people will realize how much of our catastrophic events are connected with this prevailing mood of the present, and what a serious thing it is. For just go out and ask the numerous readers of this newspaper, which is one of the most widely read in Germany, whether they even notice the grotesque and paradoxical aspects that are coming to light! People are oblivious to all of this. But it does not pass unnoticed in the events themselves; there it has its bitterly evil effects. For what is being done here is nothing less than an abuse of human intellectual power. Do you think that if these mental powers, which are used for nothing because they are alien to reality, were applied in the right way, then reality would be promoted, then they would be in the normal current; but as it is, they benefit Ahriman. It is alien to reality for the middle current, but it happens, it slips into a sphere, and that is what matters. That is the seriousness of the matter. It does not pass unnoticed, but slips into another sphere and creates facts. It creates facts that do not correspond to the true situation. Because, even on the surface, purely rationally, purely intellectually, one can imagine how that creates facts.

Our time does not believe in authority. People test everything and keep what is best! Nevertheless, it does happen that people believe in authority. A person like Fritz Mauthner has countless followers who believe his every word. They are naturally impressed by such an article. Think how many thoughts are stimulated by such an article. They are all drawn into the Ahrimanic sphere in which the article flows. The matter is unreal, and things are pushed into an unreality by it. That is what matters.

What one would like to do with such things, my dear friends, is to point out again and again the tremendous seriousness behind such considerations. Because it is true: What I have characterized in individual cases, you will encounter at every turn today. We are in the time when we only do the right thing if we decide to see clearly, without prejudice, to face life impartially. That is our task. And that is precisely what spiritual science is meant to lead to, by building the bridge between the human inner life and reality in the right way. For in this respect, people live in the most terrible fogs. One cannot begin to describe what arises when one delves into this, how people live in this respect today, in dense fog. It must be so, for people must learn to rely on themselves. People must learn to create clarity through themselves, not to get clarity through authority. This must become one of the best, one of the most important achievements of spiritual studies for the individual human soul, to gain a free, clear, unbiased judgment about what life around them offers; to break the habit that basically dominates all of humanity today: to be asleep to events. People oversleep what is right in front of them. And to shroud them in a fog is precisely the endeavor of those who come with one-sided, all kinds of monistic or “scientifically based” — as they say — ideas, but who are nothing more than materialists. For they claim, indeed assert, that they are building the bridge to reality. They lead away from reality. Tell Oscar Hertwig that he is looking at things in an unrealistic way, he will laugh at you and cannot see that he is doing so. But as a spiritual scientist, you must be somewhat shocked when you read that the closest facts of life are to be considered according to the pattern of celestial phenomena, where the facts are as far away as possible. To go through life like this, paying attention to what we experience not in books but right under our noses from morning till night – not when we are among anthroposophists, of course – offers all kinds of things that we have to pay attention to without prejudice today. For humanity is at a significant turning point. And what I have said is not a criticism of the time, but only an emphasis of what is necessary by saying: This is how it is. It is good that it has come to this, because it calls on people to stand on their own two feet and become independent. The Deity did not set itself the task of leading people through evolution as spiritually and mentally dependent automatons, and so it had to let them come to the present situation. It is wise and good, but it must also be recognized in the right way and acted upon accordingly.

To let this attitude emerge from the deepest impulses of our being as the innermost stimulus of our strength for life, that must become one of the results of our spiritual-scientific occupation. Then we may not found a voluptuous, comfortable revelry in unworldly ideas, which is so good when one wants to oversleep life; but we found that genuine worship of life, which leads the divine-spiritual forces, which are the basis of all reality, through the most important instrument for this earth

instrument to the realization of this divine-spiritual in this earthly life.

More about this next time.